Owner's Manual

GLA Operator's Manual É1565843700IËÍ 1565843700

Order no. 65155407 13 Part no. 1565843700Edition A 2015 GLA Operator's Manual Symbols X This symbol indicates an instruction Publication details Registered trademarks: that must be followed. Internet X Several of these symbols in succes- RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of sion indicate an instruction with sev- Bluetooth SIG Inc. Further information about Mercedes-Benz eral steps. vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. (Y This symbol tells you where you can on the following websites: RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks page) find more information about a topic. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) of DOLBY Laboratories. YY This symbol indicates a warning or an http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are instruction that is continued on the only) registered trademarks of Daimler AG. next page. R ® HomeLink is a registered trademark of Dis‐ This font indicates a display in the Johnson Controls. play multifunction display/COMAND dis- Editorial office RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade- play. © marks of Apple Inc. Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro- Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har- tected by copyright © 2005 or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, man International Industries. The FreeType Project without written permission from Daimler AG. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg- http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved. istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- Vehicle manufacturer tion. R SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius Daimler AG XM Radio Inc. Mercedesstraße 137 RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq- 70327 Stuttgart uity Digital Corporation. Germany RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. As at 04.11.2013 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Android™ Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- App may not yet be available in your country. Benz Limited Warranty. The technical documentation team at The equipment or product designation of your Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant vehicle may vary depending on: motoring. Rmodel Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Rorder Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Rcountry specification A Daimler Company Ravailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROperator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. You can also use the GLA Guide smartphone app:

Apple® iOS 1565843700 É1565843700IËÍ

Contents 3

Index ...... 4 At a glance ...... 31

Introduction ...... 23 Safety ...... 41

Opening and closing ...... 75

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95

Lights and windshield wipers ...... 109

Climate control ...... 125

Driving and parking ...... 141

On-board computer and displays .... 203

Stowage and features ...... 265

Maintenance and care ...... 291

Breakdown assistance ...... 305

Wheels and tires ...... 323

Technical data ...... 359 4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Air bags Deployment ...... 56 12 V socket Display message ...... 233 see Sockets Front air bag (driver, front 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) passenger) ...... 49 see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Important safety notes ...... 48 tion System) Introduction ...... 48 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel Knee bag ...... 49 drive) PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator Function/notes ...... 184 lamps ...... 43 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Side impact air bag ...... 50 drive) Window curtain air bag ...... 50 Display message ...... 250 Air-conditioning system see Climate control A Air vents ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Important safety notes ...... 138 Display message ...... 222 Rear ...... 139 Function/notes ...... 65 Setting ...... 138 Warning lamp ...... 254 Setting the center air vents ...... 138 Acceleration Setting the side air vents ...... 138 see Kickdown see Air vents Accident Alarm Automatic measures after an acci- ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ...... 73 dent ...... 58 Switching off (ATA) ...... 73 Activating/deactivating cooling Switching the function on/off with air dehumidification ...... 131 (ATA) ...... 73 Active Parking Assist Alarm system Canceling ...... 193 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Detecting parking spaces ...... 190 All-wheel drive Display message ...... 243 see 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) Exiting a parking space ...... 192 Ambient lighting General notes ...... 189 Setting the brightness (on-board Important safety notes ...... 189 computer) ...... 216 Parking ...... 191 AMG Active Service System PLUS Performance Seat ...... 100 see ASSYST PLUS AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 218 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 72 Anti-lock braking system Adaptive Brake Assist see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Function/notes ...... 67 Anti-skid chains Adaptive Highbeam Assist see Snow chains Display message ...... 237 Anti-Theft Alarm system Function/notes ...... 114 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Switching on/off ...... 115 Approach/departure angle ...... 170 Additional speedometer ...... 215 Ashtray ...... 275 Additives (engine oil) ...... 365 Assistance display (on-board com- After-sales service center puter) ...... 213 see ASSYST PLUS Index 5

Assistance menu (on-board com- Engaging park position (AMG vehi- puter) ...... 213 cles) ...... 151 ASSYST PLUS Engaging reverse gear ...... 149 Displaying a service message ...... 297 Engaging the park position ...... 149 Hiding a service message ...... 297 Holding the vehicle stationary on Notes ...... 296 uphill gradients ...... 151 Resetting the service interval dis- Kickdown ...... 152 play ...... 297 Manual drive program ...... 154 Service message ...... 296 Overview ...... 148 Special service requirements ...... 297 Problem (malfunction) ...... 157 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Program selector button ...... 152 Activating/deactivating ...... 73 Pulling away ...... 144 Function ...... 73 Selector lever ...... 150 Switching off the alarm ...... 73 Starting the engine ...... 144 ATTENTION ASSIST Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 153 Activating/deactivating ...... 214 Transmission positions ...... 151 Display message ...... 241 Automatic transmission emer- Function/notes ...... 197 gency mode ...... 157 see ATTENTION ASSIST Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 210 B Audio system Backup lamp see separate operating instructions Changing bulbs ...... 120 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Display message ...... 236 see Qualified specialist workshop Bag hook ...... 272 Authorized workshop BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 65 see Qualified specialist workshop Basic settings AUTO lights see Settings Display message ...... 237 Battery (SmartKey) see Lights Checking ...... 78 Automatic car wash (care) ...... 298 Important safety notes ...... 78 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ Replacing ...... 78 stop function) ...... 146 Battery (vehicle) Automatic engine switch-off (ECO Charging ...... 313 start/stop function) ...... 145 Display message ...... 239 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 111 Important safety notes ...... 311 Automatic transmission Jump starting ...... 315 Accelerator pedal position ...... 151 Belt Automatic drive program ...... 153 see Seat belts Changing gear ...... 151 Blind Spot Assist DIRECT SELECT lever ...... 148 Activating/deactivating ...... 214 Drive program display ...... 149 Display message ...... 242 Drive program display (selector Notes/function ...... 198 lever) ...... 150 Blower Driving tips ...... 151 see Climate control Emergency running mode ...... 157 Brake Assist Engaging drive position ...... 150 see BAS (Brake Assist System) Engaging neutral ...... 150 6 Index

Brake assistance Matte finish ...... 300 see BAS (Brake Assist System) Paint ...... 299 Brake fluid Plastic trim ...... 303 Display message ...... 228 Power washer ...... 299 Notes ...... 365 Rear view camera ...... 302 Brake lamps Roof lining ...... 304 Changing bulbs ...... 120 Seat belt ...... 304 Display message ...... 235 Seat cover ...... 303 Brakes Sensors ...... 301 ABS ...... 65 Steering wheel ...... 303 Adaptive Brake Assist ...... 67 Trim pieces ...... 303 BAS ...... 65 Washing by hand ...... 298 Brake fluid (notes) ...... 365 Wheels ...... 300 Display message ...... 222 Windows ...... 300 HOLD function ...... 181 Wiper blades ...... 301 Important safety notes ...... 164 Wooden trim ...... 303 Maintenance ...... 165 Cargo compartment enlargement ... 270 Parking brake ...... 160 Important safety notes ...... 270 Riding tips ...... 164 Cargo compartment floor Warning lamp ...... 254 Important safety notes ...... 272 Breakdown Opening/closing ...... 272 Where will I find...? ...... 306 Stowage well (under) ...... 272 see Flat tire Cargo tie down rings ...... 271 see Towing away Car key see Tow-starting see SmartKey Brightness control (instrument Car wash cluster lighting) ...... 33 see Care Bulbs Center console see Replacing bulbs Lower section ...... 37 Upper section ...... 36 C Central locking Automatic locking (on-board com- California puter) ...... 217 Important notice for retail cus- Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 76 tomers and lessees ...... 25 Changing bulbs Calling up a malfunction Brake lamps ...... 120 see Display messages Cornering light function ...... 119 Car High-beam headlamps ...... 119 see Vehicle Low-beam headlamps ...... 118 Care Rear fog lamp ...... 120 Carpets ...... 304 Reversing lamps ...... 120 Car wash ...... 298 Turn signals (front) ...... 119 Display ...... 302 Turn signals (rear) ...... 120 Exhaust pipe ...... 302 Child-proof locks Exterior lights ...... 301 Important safety notes ...... 63 Gear or selector lever ...... 303 Rear doors ...... 64 General notes ...... 297 Interior ...... 302 Index 7

Children Switching the rear window In the vehicle ...... 58 defroster on/off ...... 136 Restraint systems ...... 59 Switching the ZONE function on/ Special seat belt retractor ...... 59 off ...... 134 Child seat Climate control system Forward-facing restraint system ...... 62 Automatic engine start ...... 146 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Automatic engine switch-off ...... 145 anchors ...... 60 Deactivating/activating ...... 146 On the front-passenger seat ...... 62 General information ...... 145 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 62 Important safety notes ...... 145 Top Tether ...... 61 Introduction ...... 145 Cigarette lighter ...... 276 Cockpit Cleaning Overview ...... 32 Mirror turn signal ...... 301 see Instrument cluster Climate control Coffee cup symbol Air-conditioning system ...... 127 see ATTENTION ASSIST Automatic climate control (dual- COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST zone) ...... 129 Display message ...... 222 Controlling automatically ...... 133 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Cooling with air dehumidification .. 131 PLUS Defrosting the windows ...... 135 Activating/deactivating ...... 214 Defrosting the windshield ...... 135 Display message ...... 229 General notes ...... 126 Operation/notes ...... 66 Indicator lamp ...... 133 COMAND Information about using auto- see separate operating instructions matic climate control ...... 130 Combination switch ...... 112 Maximum cooling ...... 135 Compass Notes on using the air-condition- Calibrating ...... 290 ing system ...... 128 Calling up ...... 289 Overview of systems ...... 126 Setting ...... 289 Problems with cooling with air Consumption statistics (on-board dehumidification ...... 133 computer) ...... 207 Problem with the rear window Convenience closing feature ...... 88 defroster ...... 137 Convenience opening feature ...... 88 Refrigerant ...... 367 Coolant (engine) Refrigerant filling capacity ...... 367 Checking the level ...... 295 Setting the air distribution ...... 134 Display message ...... 238 Setting the airflow ...... 134 Filling capacity ...... 366 Setting the air vents ...... 138 Important safety notes ...... 365 Setting the temperature ...... 133 Temperature (on-board computer, Switching air-recirculation mode AMG vehicles) ...... 218 on/off ...... 137 Temperature gauge ...... 204 Switching on/off ...... 131 Warning lamp ...... 260 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 137 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ...... 30 8 Index

Cornering light function Delayed switch-off Changing bulbs ...... 119 Exterior lighting (on-board com- Display message ...... 234 puter) ...... 216 Function/notes ...... 113 Interior lighting ...... 217 Cover Diagnostics connection ...... 27 see Roller sunblind Digital speedometer ...... 208 Crash-responsive emergency light- DIRECT SELECT lever ing ...... 116 Automatic transmission ...... 148 Cruise control Display (cleaning instructions) ...... 302 Activation conditions ...... 172 Display messages Cruise control lever ...... 172 ASSYST PLUS ...... 296 Deactivating ...... 173 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 221 Display message ...... 244 Driving systems ...... 241 Driving system ...... 172 Engine ...... 238 General notes ...... 172 General notes ...... 221 Important safety notes ...... 172 Hiding (on-board computer) ...... 221 Setting a speed ...... 173 Lights ...... 234 Storing and maintaining current Safety systems ...... 222 speed ...... 172 SmartKey ...... 252 Cup holder Tires ...... 245 Center console ...... 274 Vehicle ...... 248 Important safety notes ...... 273 Distance control Rear compartment ...... 274 see DISTRONIC PLUS see Cup holder Distance recorder ...... 207 Customer Assistance Center see Odometer (CAC) ...... 28 see Trip odometer Customer Relations Department ...... 28 Distance warning function Function/notes ...... 66 D Warning lamp ...... 262 DISTRONIC PLUS Dashboard Activation conditions ...... 175 see Cockpit Dashboard lighting Cruise control lever ...... 175 Deactivating ...... 178 see Instrument cluster lighting Display message ...... 243 Data Displays in the multifunction dis- see Technical data play ...... 179 Daytime running lamp mode Driving tips ...... 180 see Daytime running lamps Function/notes ...... 174 Daytime running lamps Important safety notes ...... 174 Display message ...... 237 Setting the specified minimum Switching on/off (on-board com- distance ...... 178 puter) ...... 216 Warning lamp ...... 262 Switching on/off (switch) ...... 111 Doors Declarations of conformity ...... 27 Automatic locking (on-board computer) ...... 217 Automatic locking (switch) ...... 82 Index 9

Central locking/unlocking Display message ...... 241 (SmartKey) ...... 76 DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 174 Control panel ...... 39 HOLD function ...... 181 Display message ...... 250 Lane Keeping Assist ...... 200 Emergency locking ...... 83 Lane Tracking package ...... 198 Emergency unlocking ...... 83 PARKTRONIC ...... 186 Important safety notes ...... 81 RACE START (AMG vehicles) ...... 183 Opening (from inside) ...... 81 Rear view camera ...... 194 Drinking and driving ...... 163 Driving tips Drive program Automatic transmission ...... 151 Automatic ...... 153 Brakes ...... 164 Display ...... 150 Break-in period ...... 142 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 149 Checking brake lining thickness .... 166 Manual ...... 154 DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 180 SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 219 Downhill gradient ...... 164 Driver's door Drinking and driving ...... 163 see Doors Driving abroad ...... 110 Driver's seat Driving in winter ...... 167 see Seats Driving on flooded roads ...... 167 Driving abroad Driving on sand ...... 170 Mercedes-Benz Service ...... 297 Driving on wet roads ...... 167 Symmetrical low beam ...... 110 Exhaust check ...... 163 Driving in mountainous terrain Fuel ...... 163 Approach/departure angle ...... 170 General ...... 162 Driving off-road Hydroplaning ...... 167 see Off-road driving Icy road surfaces ...... 167 Driving on flooded roads ...... 167 Limited braking efficiency on sal- Driving safety systems ted roads ...... 165 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ...... 65 Off-road driving ...... 168 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 72 Snow chains ...... 327 Adaptive Brake Assist ...... 67 Symmetrical low beam ...... 110 BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 65 Tire ruts ...... 170 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Traveling uphill ...... 170 PLUS ...... 66 Wet road surface ...... 165 Distance warning function ...... 66 DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) EBD (electronic brake force distri- Display message ...... 241 bution) ...... 72 Function/notes ...... 184 DVD video (on-board computer) ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- ...... 211 gram) ...... 68 Important safety information ...... 64 E Overview ...... 64 EASY-VARIO-PLUS system STEER CONTROL ...... 72 Cargo compartment enlargement .. 270 Driving systems EBD (electronic brake force distri- Active Parking Assist ...... 189 bution) ATTENTION ASSIST ...... 197 Display message ...... 224 Blind Spot Assist ...... 198 Function/notes ...... 72 Cruise control ...... 172 10 Index

ECO display Notes about oil grades ...... 364 Function/notes ...... 163 Temperature (on-board computer, On-board computer ...... 208 AMG vehicles) ...... 218 Electronic Stability Program Viscosity ...... 365 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Engine oil additives Electronic Traction System see Additives (engine oil) see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- ESC (Electronic Stability Control) tion System) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Automatic measures after an acci- gram) dent ...... 58 Activating/deactivating (on- Emergency braking board computer, except AMG see BAS (Brake Assist System) vehicles) ...... 213 Emergency release AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 219 Driver's door ...... 83 Characteristics ...... 69 Vehicle ...... 83 Deactivating/activating (button Emergency Tensioning Devices in AMG vehicles) ...... 70 Activation ...... 56 Deactivating/activating (notes; Emergency unlocking except AMG vehicles) ...... 70 Tailgate ...... 86 Display message ...... 222 Emissions control Function/notes ...... 68 Service and warranty information .... 24 General notes ...... 68 Engine Important safety information ...... 69 Check Engine warning lamp ...... 260 Warning lamp ...... 256 Display message ...... 238 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- ECO start/stop function ...... 145 tem) ...... 69 Engine number ...... 361 Exhaust check ...... 163 Irregular running ...... 147 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc- Jump-starting ...... 315 tions) ...... 302 Starting problems ...... 147 Exterior lighting Starting the engine with the Setting ...... 110 SmartKey ...... 144 Setting options ...... 110 Switching off ...... 160 see Lights Tow-starting (vehicle) ...... 320 Exterior mirrors Engine, starting Adjusting ...... 103 see Starting (engine) Dipping (automatic) ...... 104 Engine electronics Folding in/out (automatically) ...... 104 Problem (malfunction) ...... 147 Folding in/out (electrically) ...... 103 Engine oil Folding in when locking (on-board Adding ...... 294 computer) ...... 218 Additives ...... 365 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104 Checking the oil level ...... 293 Setting ...... 104 Checking the oil level using the Storing settings (memory func- dipstick ...... 294 tion) ...... 106 Display message ...... 240 Storing the parking position ...... 105 Filling capacity ...... 365 Eyeglasses compartment ...... 267 General notes ...... 293 Index 11

F Fuse box in the engine compartment ...... 321 Filler cap Fuse box in the front-passenger see Fuel filler flap footwell ...... 322 Filling capacities (Technical data) ...361 Important safety notes ...... 320 Flat tire see Fuses MOExtended tires ...... 307 Preparing the vehicle ...... 306 G TIREFIT kit ...... 308 Floormats ...... 290 Garage door opener Fog lamps Clearing the memory ...... 289 Extended range ...... 114 General notes ...... 286 Switching on/off ...... 111 Important safety notes ...... 286 Front fog lamps Opening/closing the garage door .. 288 Display message ...... 236 Programming (button in the rear- Switching on/off ...... 111 view mirror) ...... 286 Front-passenger seat Gear indicator (on-board com- Folding the backrest forward/ puter, AMG vehicles) ...... 218 back ...... 269 Gear or selector lever (cleaning Fuel guidelines) ...... 303 Additives ...... 363 Genuine parts ...... 23 Consumption statistics ...... 207 Glove box ...... 267 Displaying the current consumption ...... 208 H Displaying the range ...... 208 Handbrake Driving tips ...... 163 see Parking brake Flexible fuel vehicles ...... 363 Handling control system Fuel gauge ...... 33 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Grade (gasoline) ...... 362 Hands-free system Important safety notes ...... 362 see Mobile phone Premium-grade unleaded gaso- Hazard warning lamps line ...... 362 Problem (malfunction) ...... 159 Display message ...... 251 Refueling ...... 157 Notes ...... 113 Headlamps Tank content/reserve fuel ...... 362 Fuel filler flap Cleaning system (notes) ...... 366 Opening ...... 158 Fogging up ...... 115 Fuel level see Lights Head restraints Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...... 208 Adjusting ...... 98 Fuel tank Adjusting (electrically) ...... 99 Adjusting (manually) ...... 99 Capacity ...... 362 Adjusting (rear) ...... 100 Problem (malfunction) ...... 159 Fuses General notes ...... 99 Heating Allocation chart ...... 322 see Climate control Before changing ...... 321 12 Index

High-beam headlamps Reading lamp ...... 115 Changing bulbs ...... 119 Setting the brightness of the Display message ...... 235 ambient lighting (on-board com- Switching on/off ...... 112 puter) ...... 216 Hill start assist ...... 144 HOLD function J Activating ...... 182 Jack Deactivating ...... 182 Storage location ...... 306 Display message ...... 241 Using ...... 349 Function/notes ...... 181 Jump starting (engine) ...... 315 Hood Closing ...... 293 K Display message ...... 250 Important safety notes ...... 292 Kickdown Opening ...... 292 Driving tips ...... 152 Horn ...... 32 Manual drive program ...... 156 Hydroplaning ...... 167 Knee bag ...... 49

I L Ignition key Lamps see SmartKey see Warning and indicator lamps Ignition lock Lane detection (automatic) see Key positions see Lane Keeping Assist Immobilizer ...... 72 Lane Keeping Assist Indicator lamps Activating/deactivating ...... 214 see Warning and indicator lamps Display message ...... 242 Indicators Function/information ...... 200 see Turn signals Lane Tracking package ...... 198 Inspection Lap time (RACETIMER) ...... 219 see ASSYST PLUS LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Instrument cluster anchors ...... 60 Overview ...... 33 License plate lamp (display mes- Settings ...... 215 sage) ...... 236 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 34 Light function, active Instrument cluster lighting ...... 204 Display message ...... 237 Interior lighting ...... 115 Lights Automatic control ...... 116 Activating/deactivating the inte- Delayed switch-off (on-board rior lighting delayed switch-off ...... 217 computer) ...... 217 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 111 Emergency lighting ...... 116 Cornering light function ...... 113 Important safety notes ...... 116 Display message ...... 234 Manual control ...... 116 Driving abroad ...... 110 Overview ...... 115 Fog lamps ...... 111 Fog lamps (extended) ...... 114 Hazard warning lamps ...... 113 High beam flasher ...... 113 Index 13

High-beam headlamps ...... 112 Lumbar support Light switch ...... 110 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Low-beam headlamps ...... 111 port ...... 100 Parking lamps ...... 112 see Lumbar support Rear fog lamp ...... 112 Setting the brightness of the M ambient lighting (on-board com- M+S tires puter) ...... 216 ...... 326 Standing lamps ...... 112 Maintenance Switching the daytime running see ASSYST PLUS lamps on/off (on-board com- Malfunction message puter) ...... 216 see Display messages Switching the daytime running Matte finish (cleaning instruc- lamps on/off (switch) ...... 111 tions) ...... 300 Switching the exterior lighting mbrace delayed switch-off on/off (on- Call priority ...... 281 board computer) ...... 216 Display message ...... 228 Switching the surround lighting Downloading destinations on/off (on-board computer) ...... 216 (COMAND) ...... 281 Turn signals ...... 112 Downloading routes ...... 285 see Interior lighting Emergency call ...... 278 see Lights General notes ...... 277 see Replacing bulbs Geo fencing ...... 285 Light sensor (display message) ...... 237 Locating a stolen vehicle ...... 284 Loading guidelines ...... 266 MB info call button ...... 280 Locking Remote vehicle locking ...... 283 see Central locking Roadside Assistance button ...... 280 Locking (doors) Search & Send ...... 282 Automatic ...... 82 Self-test ...... 278 Emergency locking ...... 83 Speed alert ...... 285 From inside (central locking but- System ...... 278 ton) ...... 82 Triggering the vehicle alarm ...... 285 Locking centrally Vehicle remote malfunction diag- see Central locking nosis ...... 284 Locking verification signal (on- Vehicle remote unlocking ...... 283 Mechanical key board computer) ...... 217 Low-beam headlamps Function/notes ...... 77 Inserting ...... 77 Changing bulbs ...... 118 Locking vehicle ...... 83 Display message ...... 234 Unlocking the driver's door ...... 83 Setting for driving abroad (sym- Media Interface metrical) ...... 110 Switching on/off ...... 111 see Separate operating instructions Lubricant additives Memory card (audio) ...... 211 Memory function see Additives (engine oil) ...... 106 Message memory (on-board computer) ...... 221 Messages see Display messages 14 Index

Mirrors Operation ...... 51 see Exterior mirrors System self-test ...... 53 see Rear-view mirror Occupant safety see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Automatic measures after an acci- Mobile phone dent ...... 58 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 211 Children in the vehicle ...... 58 see Telephone Important safety notes ...... 43 Model type Pets in the vehicle ...... 64 see Vehicle identification plate OCS Modifying the programming Conditions ...... 51 (SmartKey) ...... 77 Faults ...... 55 MOExtended tires ...... 307 Operation ...... 51 Mounting wheels System self-test ...... 53 Lowering the vehicle ...... 351 Off-road driving Mounting a new wheel ...... 351 Approach/departure angle ...... 369 Preparing the vehicle ...... 348 Checklist after driving off-road ...... 170 Raising the vehicle ...... 349 Checklist before driving off-road .... 169 Removing a wheel ...... 351 General information ...... 169 Securing the vehicle against roll- Important safety notes ...... 168 ing away ...... 349 Maximum gradient climbing abil- MP3 ity ...... 369 Operation ...... 211 Maximum water depth ...... 369 see separate operating instructions Traveling uphill ...... 170 Multifunction display Off-road program ...... 186 Function/notes ...... 206 Off-road system Permanent display ...... 216 DSR ...... 184 Multifunction steering wheel Off-road 4ETS ...... 69 Operating the on-board computer .. 205 Off-road ABS ...... 65 Overview ...... 35 Off road drive program ...... 186 Off-road ESP® ...... 72 N Oil see Engine oil Navigation On-board computer Menu (on-board computer) ...... 209 AMG menu ...... 218 see separate operating instructions Assistance menu ...... 213 Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Audio menu ...... 210 cle ...... 142 Convenience submenu ...... 218 Displaying a service message ...... 297 O Display messages ...... 221 Occupant Classification System DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 179 (OCS) Factory settings submenu ...... 218 Conditions ...... 51 Important safety notes ...... 204 Faults ...... 55 Instrument cluster submenu ...... 215 Lighting submenu ...... 216 Menu overview ...... 207 Message memory ...... 221 Navigation menu ...... 209 Index 15

Operation ...... 205 Parking aid RACETIMER ...... 219 Active Parking Assist ...... 189 Service menu ...... 215 see Exterior mirrors Settings menu ...... 215 see PARKTRONIC Standard display ...... 207 Parking assistance Telephone menu ...... 211 see PARKTRONIC Trip menu ...... 207 Parking brake Vehicle submenu ...... 217 Display message ...... 224 Video DVD operation ...... 211 Electric parking brake ...... 160 On-board diagnostic interface Warning lamp ...... 259 see Diagnostics connection see Parking brake Opening and closing the side trim Parking lamps panels ...... 119 Switching on/off ...... 112 Operating safety PARKTRONIC Declaration of conformity ...... 27 Deactivating/activating ...... 188 Important safety notes ...... 26 Driving system ...... 186 Operating system Function/notes ...... 186 see On-board computer Important safety notes ...... 186 Operator's Manual Problem (malfunction) ...... 189 Vehicle equipment ...... 24 Range of the sensors ...... 187 Outside temperature display ...... 205 Warning display ...... 188 Overhead control panel ...... 38 PASSENGER AIR BAG Override feature Indicator lamps ...... 43 Rear side windows ...... 64 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp P Problem (malfunction) ...... 233 Permanent all-wheel drive Paint code number ...... 360 see 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 299 Pets in the vehicle ...... 64 Panic alarm ...... 42 Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Panorama roof with power tilt/ tions) ...... 303 sliding panel Power washers ...... 299 Important safety notes ...... 90 Power windows Operating ...... 91 see Side windows Problem (malfunction) ...... 94 Program selector button ...... 152 Reversing feature ...... 91 Protection against theft Parcel net ...... 269 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ...... 73 Parcel shelf ...... 271 Immobilizer ...... 72 Parking ...... 159 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Important safety notes ...... 159 Protection of the environment Parking brake ...... 160 General notes ...... 23 Position of exterior mirror, front- Pulling away passenger side ...... 105 Automatic transmission ...... 144 Rear view camera ...... 194 see Active Parking Assist Q see PARKTRONIC Qualified specialist workshop ...... 28 16 Index

R Important safety notes ...... 157 Refueling process ...... 158 RACE START (AMG vehicles) ...... 183 see Fuel RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 219 Remote control Radio Garage door opener ...... 286 Selecting a station ...... 210 Programming (garage door see separate operating instructions opener) ...... 286 Radio-wave reception/transmis- Replacing bulbs sion in the vehicle Important safety notes ...... 117 Declaration of conformity ...... 27 Overview of bulb types ...... 117 Rain closing feature (panorama Removing/replacing the cover roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 92 (front wheel arch) ...... 118 Reading lamp ...... 115 Reporting safety defects ...... 28 Rear compartment Reserve (fuel tank) Setting the air vents ...... 139 see Fuel Rear fog lamp Reserve fuel Changing bulbs ...... 120 Display message ...... 240 Display message ...... 236 Warning lamp ...... 260 Switching on/off ...... 112 see Fuel Rear lamps Residual heat (climate control) ...... 137 see Lights Restraint system Rear seat Display message ...... 230 see Rear seats Introduction ...... 42 Rear seats Problem (malfunction) ...... 259 Folding the backrest forwards/ Warning lamp (function) ...... 43 back ...... 270 Reverse gear (selector lever) ...... 150 Rear view camera Reversing feature Cleaning instructions ...... 302 Panorama sliding sunroof ...... 91 Function/notes ...... 194 Roller sunblinds ...... 92 Switching on/off ...... 194 Side windows ...... 87 Rear-view mirror Tailgate ...... 84 Anti-glare (manual) ...... 103 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 25 Dipping (automatic) ...... 104 Roller sunblind Rear window defroster Opening/closing ...... 93 Problem (malfunction) ...... 137 Panorama roof with power tilt/ Switching on/off ...... 136 sliding panel ...... 92 Rear window wiper Roof carrier ...... 273 Replacing the wiper blade ...... 123 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Switching on/off ...... 122 guidelines) ...... 304 Recuperation display ...... 208 Roof load (maximum) ...... 368 Recycling Route (navigation) see Protection of the environment see Route guidance (navigation) Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Route guidance (navigation) ...... 209 tem) Important safety notes ...... 367 Refueling Fuel gauge ...... 33 Index 17

S Engine oil ...... 364 Fuel ...... 362 Safety Important safety notes ...... 361 Children in the vehicle ...... 58 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Child restraint systems ...... 59 tem) ...... 367 Occupant Classification System Washer fluid ...... 366 (OCS) ...... 51 Setting a speed Safety system see Cruise control see Driving safety systems Settings Seat belts Factory (on-board computer) ...... 218 Adjusting the height ...... 46 On-board computer ...... 215 Cleaning ...... 304 Setting the air distribution ...... 134 Correct usage ...... 45 Setting the airflow ...... 134 Fastening ...... 46 SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 219 Important safety guidelines ...... 44 Side impact air bag ...... 50 Introduction ...... 44 Side marker lamp (display mes- Releasing ...... 47 sage) ...... 236 Warning lamp ...... 252 Side windows Warning lamp (function) ...... 47 Seats Cleaning ...... 300 Convenience closing feature ...... 88 Adjusting (AMG Performance Convenience opening feature ...... 88 Seat) ...... 100 Important safety information ...... 87 Adjusting (electrically) ...... 98 Opening/closing ...... 87 Adjusting (manually) ...... 98 Problem (malfunction) ...... 90 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Resetting ...... 89 port ...... 100 Reversing feature ...... 87 Adjusting the head restraint ...... 98 Sliding sunroof Calling up a stored setting (memory function) ...... 107 see Panorama roof with power Cleaning the cover ...... 303 tilt/sliding panel SmartKey Correct driver's seat position ...... 96 Important safety notes ...... 97 Changing the battery ...... 78 Seat heating problem ...... 102 Changing the programming ...... 77 Storing settings (memory func- Checking the battery ...... 78 tion) ...... 106 Convenience closing feature ...... 88 Switching seat heating on/off ...... 100 Convenience opening feature ...... 88 Selecting a gear Display message ...... 252 see Automatic transmission Door central locking/unlocking ...... 76 Selector lever Important safety notes ...... 76 Loss ...... 80 see Automatic transmission Mechanical key ...... 77 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ...... 301 Positions (ignition lock) ...... 143 Service Center Problem (malfunction) ...... 80 see Qualified specialist workshop Starting the engine ...... 144 Service menu (on-board com- SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 143 puter) ...... 215 Snow chains ...... 327 Service products Brake fluid ...... 365 Coolant (engine) ...... 365 18 Index

Sockets Stowage compartments Center console ...... 276 Armrest (front) ...... 268 Luggage compartment ...... 277 Armrest (under) ...... 268 Points to observe before use ...... 276 Center console (rear) ...... 269 Rear compartment ...... 277 Cup holders ...... 273 Specialist workshop ...... 28 Eyeglasses compartment ...... 267 Special seat belt retractor ...... 59 Glove box ...... 267 Speed, controlling Important safety information ...... 267 see Cruise control Parcel net ...... 269 Speed Limit Assist Under driver's seat/front- General notes ...... 198 passenger seat ...... 268 Speedometer Summer opening Activating/deactivating the addi- see Convenience opening feature tional speedometer ...... 215 Summer tires ...... 326 Digital ...... 208 Sun visor ...... 275 In the Instrument cluster ...... 33 Surround lighting (on-board com- Segments ...... 205 puter) ...... 216 Selecting the unit of measure- SUV ment ...... 215 (Sport Utility Vehicle) ...... 26 SPORT handling mode Switching air-recirculation mode Activating/deactivating (AMG on/off ...... 137 vehicles) ...... 70 Warning lamp ...... 257 T Standing lamps Tachometer ...... 205 Display message ...... 236 Tailgate Switching on/off ...... 112 Start/stop function Display message ...... 250 Emergency unlocking ...... 86 see ECO start/stop function Important safety notes ...... 83 Starting (engine) ...... 143 Limiting the opening angle ...... 86 STEER CONTROL ...... 72 Obstruction detection ...... 84 Steering (display message) ...... 251 Opening/closing (from outside) ...... 84 Steering assistant STEER CON- Opening/closing automatically TROL from inside ...... 85 see STEER CONTROL Opening/closing automatically Steering wheel from outside ...... 85 Adjusting (manually) ...... 102 Opening dimensions ...... 368 Button overview ...... 35 Tail lamps Buttons (on-board computer) ...... 205 Display message ...... 235 Cleaning ...... 303 see Lights Important safety notes ...... 102 Tank Paddle shifters ...... 153 see Fuel tank Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 153 Tank content Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ...... 219 Fuel gauge ...... 33 Stowage Technical data Center console (front) ...... 267 Information ...... 360 Stowage areas ...... 267 Tires/wheels ...... 352 Vehicle data ...... 368 Index 19

TELEAID Maximum ...... 330 Call priority ...... 281 Notes ...... 329 Downloading destinations Not reached (TIREFIT) ...... 310 (COMAND) ...... 281 Reached (TIREFIT) ...... 310 Downloading routes ...... 285 Recommended ...... 328 Emergency call ...... 278 see Tire pressure General notes ...... 277 Tire pressure loss warning sys- Geo fencing ...... 285 tem Locating a stolen vehicle ...... 284 General notes ...... 331 MB info call button ...... 280 Important safety notes ...... 331 Remote vehicle locking ...... 283 Restarting ...... 331 Roadside Assistance button ...... 280 Tire pressure monitor Search & Send ...... 282 Checking the tire pressure elec- Self-test ...... 278 tronically ...... 334 Speed alert ...... 285 Function/notes ...... 332 System ...... 278 General notes ...... 332 Triggering the vehicle alarm ...... 285 Restarting ...... 334 Vehicle remote malfunction diag- Warning lamp ...... 263 nosis ...... 284 Warning message ...... 334 Vehicle remote unlocking ...... 283 Tires Telephone Aspect ratio (definition) ...... 346 Accepting a call ...... 212 Average weight of the vehicle Display message ...... 251 occupants (definition) ...... 345 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 211 Bar (definition) ...... 345 Number from the phone book ...... 212 Changing a wheel ...... 347 Redialing ...... 212 Characteristics ...... 345 Rejecting/ending a call ...... 212 Checking ...... 325 Temperature Curb weight (definition) ...... 346 Coolant ...... 204 Definition of terms ...... 345 Coolant (on-board computer, Direction of rotation ...... 348 AMG vehicles) ...... 218 Display message ...... 245 Engine oil (on-board computer, Distribution of the vehicle occu- AMG vehicles) ...... 218 pants (definition) ...... 347 Outside temperature ...... 205 DOT, Tire Identification Number Setting (climate control) ...... 133 (TIN) ...... 344 Through-loading ...... 269 DOT (Department of Transporta- Time tion) (definition) ...... 345 see separate operating instructions GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Timing (RACETIMER) ...... 219 (definition) ...... 345 Tiredness assistant General notes ...... 352 see ATTENTION ASSIST GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- TIREFIT kit ...... 308 inition) ...... 346 Tire pressure GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 332 ing) (definition) ...... 346 Checking manually ...... 331 Important safety notes ...... 324 Display message ...... 245 Increased vehicle weight due to Important safety notes ...... 332 optional equipment (definition) ...... 345 Information on driving ...... 324 20 Index

Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...... 346 Wear indicator (definition) ...... 347 Labeling (overview) ...... 341 Wheel and tire combination ...... 354 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 347 Wheel rim (definition) ...... 345 Load index ...... 344 see Flat tire Load index (definition) ...... 346 Tool M+S tires ...... 326 see Vehicle tool kit Maximum loaded vehicle weight Top Tether ...... 61 (definition) ...... 346 Towing away Maximum load on a tire (defini- Important safety guidelines ...... 317 tion) ...... 346 Installing the towing eye ...... 318 Maximum permissible tire pres- Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ...... 320 sure (definition) ...... 346 Removing the towing eye ...... 319 Maximum tire load ...... 339 Transporting the vehicle ...... 320 Maximum tire load (definition) ...... 346 With both axles on the ground ...... 319 MOExtended tires ...... 326 With front axle raised ...... 319 Optional equipment weight (defi- Tow-starting nition) ...... 347 Emergency engine starting ...... 320 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- Important safety notes ...... 317 inition) ...... 346 Installing the towing eye ...... 318 Replacing ...... 348 Removing the towing eye ...... 319 Service life ...... 326 Traction system Sidewall (definition) ...... 347 see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Snow chains ...... 327 tion System) Speed rating (definition) ...... 346 Transmission Storing ...... 348 see Automatic transmission Structure and characteristics Transmission position display ...... 149 (definition) ...... 345 Transporting the vehicle ...... 320 Summer tires ...... 167 Traveling uphill Summer tires in winter ...... 326 Brow of hill ...... 171 Temperature ...... 341 Driving downhill ...... 171 TIN (Tire Identification Number) Maximum gradient-climbing capa- (definition) ...... 347 bility ...... 171 Tire bead (definition) ...... 347 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- Tire pressure (definition) ...... 347 tions) ...... 303 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 345 Trip computer (on-board com- Tire size (data) ...... 352 puter) ...... 207 Tire size designation, load-bearing Trip odometer capacity, speed rating ...... 342 Calling up ...... 207 Tire tread ...... 325 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 208 Tire tread (definition) ...... 347 see Trip odometer Total load limit (definition) ...... 347 Trunk Traction ...... 340 Traction (definition) ...... 347 see Cargo compartment Tread wear ...... 340 see Tailgate Trunk load (maximum) Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 368 Standards ...... 340 Turn signals Uniform Tire Quality Grading Changing bulbs (front) ...... 119 Standards (definition) ...... 345 Changing bulbs (rear) ...... 120 Index 21

Display message ...... 235 Vehicle identification number Switching on/off ...... 112 see VIN Type identification plate Vehicle identification plate ...... 360 see Vehicle identification plate Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS U Vehicle tool kit ...... 306 Unlocking Ventilation Emergency unlocking ...... 83 see Climate control Video (DVD) From inside the vehicle (central ...... 211 unlocking button) ...... 82 VIN Seat ...... 361 V Type plate ...... 360 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ...... 275 W Vehicle Warning and indicator lamps Correct use ...... 28 Data acquisition ...... 29 ABS ...... 254 Equipment ...... 24 Brakes ...... 254 Individual settings ...... 215 Check Engine ...... 260 Limited Warranty ...... 29 Coolant ...... 260 Loading ...... 335 Distance warning ...... 262 Locking (in an emergency) ...... 83 DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 262 ® Locking (SmartKey) ...... 76 ESP ...... 256 Lowering ...... 351 ESP® OFF ...... 257 Maintenance ...... 25 Fuel tank ...... 260 Parking for a long period ...... 162 Overview ...... 34 Pulling away ...... 144 Reserve fuel ...... 260 Raising ...... 349 Restraint system ...... 259 Reporting problems ...... 28 Seat belt ...... 252 Securing from rolling away ...... 349 SPORT handling mode ...... 257 Towing away ...... 317 Tire pressure monitor ...... 263 Tow-starting ...... 317 Warranty ...... 24 Transporting ...... 320 Washer fluid Unlocking (in an emergency) ...... 83 Display message ...... 251 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 76 Wheel and tire combination Vehicle data ...... 368 see Tires Vehicle battery Wheel bolt tightening torque ...... 351 see Battery (vehicle) Wheel chock ...... 349 Vehicle data see Wheel chock Roof load (maximum) ...... 368 Wheels Vehicle data (off-road driving) Changing a wheel ...... 347 Approach/departure angle ...... 369 Checking ...... 325 Maximum gradient climbing abil- Cleaning ...... 300 ity ...... 369 Cleaning (warning) ...... 348 Maximum water depth ...... 369 General notes ...... 352 Vehicle dimensions ...... 368 Important safety notes ...... 324 Vehicle emergency locking ...... 83 Information on driving ...... 324 22 Index

Interchanging/changing ...... 348 Mounting a new wheel ...... 351 Mounting a wheel ...... 348 Removing a wheel ...... 351 Snow chains ...... 327 Storing ...... 348 Tightening torque ...... 351 Wheel size/tire size ...... 352 Window curtain air bag Display message ...... 231 Operation ...... 50 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...... 135 see Windshield Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ...... 296 Important safety notes ...... 366 Windshield wipers Display message ...... 251 Problem (malfunction) ...... 124 Rear window wiper ...... 122 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 122 Switching on/off ...... 121 Winter driving Slippery road surfaces ...... 167 Snow chains ...... 327 Winter operation General notes ...... 326 Winter tires M+S tires ...... 326 Wiper blades Cleaning ...... 301 Important safety notes ...... 122 Replacing (rear window) ...... 123 Replacing (windshield) ...... 122 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) ...... 303 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop

Z ZONE function Switching on/off ...... 134 Introduction 23

Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. General notes Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion. hensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom- planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require and humanity into account. you to dispose of materials, first try to regen- You too can help to protect the environment erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant by operating your vehicle in an environmen- environmental rules and regulations when tally responsible manner. disposing of materials. In this way you will Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, help to protect the environment. transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style H Environmental note You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same Operating conditions: quality as new parts. They are covered by the Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- same Limited Warranty entitlements as new sumption. parts. Ralways make sure that the tire pressures ! are correct. Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. ces, as well as control units and sensors for R these restraint systems, may be installed in remove roof racks once you no longer need the following areas of your vehicle: them. R Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute doors R to environmental protection. You should door pillars therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rdoor sills Ralways have service work carried out at a Rseats qualified specialist workshop. Rcockpit Personal driving style: Rinstrument cluster Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rcenter console starting the engine. Do not install accessories such as audio Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle systems in these areas. Do not carry out is stationary. repairs or welding. You could impair the Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance operating efficiency of the restraint sys- from the vehicle in front. tems. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and Have aftermarket accessories installed at a braking. qualified specialist workshop.

Z 24 Introduction

You could jeopardize the operating safety of The Operator's Manual and Maintenance your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels Booklet are important documents and should as well as accessories relevant to safety be kept in the vehicle. which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use Service and vehicle operation only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of Warranty equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically The implied warranty for your vehicle applies approved for your vehicle. in accordance with the warranty terms and Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor- strict quality control. Every part has been spe- mation booklet. cifically developed, manufactured or selected Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. replace and repair all factory-installed parts in Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should accordance with the following warranty terms therefore be used. and conditions: More than 300,000 different genuine RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty Mercedes-Benz parts are available for REmission System Warranty Mercedes-Benz models. REmission Performance Warranty All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main- R tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu- for necessary service and repair work. In addi- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode tion, strategically located parts delivery cen- Island and Vermont Emission Control Sys- ters provide quick and reliable parts service. tem Warranty R Always specify the vehicle identification num- State warranty enforcement laws (lemon ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes- laws) Benz parts (Y page 360). Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces- sories warranties. These are available at any Operator's Manual authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and War- ranty Information booklet, have an author- This Operator's Manual describes all models ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a and all standard and optional equipment of replacement. The new Service and War- your vehicle available at the time of going to ranty Information booklet will be posted to print. Country-specific differences are possi- you. ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Introduction 25

Information for customers in Califor- Maintenance nia The Service and Warranty Booklet describes Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals. purchase price or lease price, if after a rea- Always have the Service and Warranty Book- sonable number of repair attempts let with you when you bring the vehicle to an Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser- ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or vice advisor will record every service for you more substantial defects or malfunctions in in the Service and Warranty Booklet. the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the Roadside Assistance accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance whichever occurs first, a reasonable number Program offers technical help in the event of a of repair attempts is presumed for a retail breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside buyer or lessee if one or more of the following Assistance Hotline are answered by our occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (1) the same substantial defect or malfunc- (USA) tion results in a condition that is likely to 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc- For additional information, refer to the tion has been subject to repair two or Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- more times, and you have directly noti- gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis- fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing tance" section in the Service and Warranty of the need for its repair, booklet (Canada). You will find both in your (2) the same substantial defect or malfunc- vehicle literature portfolio. tion of a less serious nature than cate- gory (1) has been subject to repair four or Change of address or change of own- more times and you have directly notified ership us in writing of the need for its repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of In the event of a change of address, please repair of the same or different substantial send us the "Notification of Address Change" defects or malfunctions for a cumulative in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim- total of more than 30 calendar days. ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- tance Center (USA) at the hotline number Please send your written notice to: 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (Canada) at Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con- One Mercedes Drive tacting you in a timely manner should the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

Z 26 Introduction

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Center (USA) at the hotline number Always adapt your speed and driving style to 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the Customer Service (Canada) at prevailing road and weather conditions. 1-800-387-0100. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Vehicle operation outside the USA Failure to operate this vehicle safely may and Canada result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign and severe or fatal injury. countries, please be aware that: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig- Rservice facilities or replacement parts may nificantly more likely to die than a person not be readily available. wearing a seat belt. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic You and all vehicle occupants should always converter may not be available. Leaded fuel wear your seat belts. may cause damage to the catalytic converter. Operating safety Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause Important safety notes engine damage. G WARNING Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European If you do not have the prescribed service/ Delivery Program. For details, consult an maintenance work or any required repairs authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to carried out, this can result in malfunctions or one of the following addresses. system failures. There is a risk of an accident. In the USA Always have the prescribed service/mainte- Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC nance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive G WARNING Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 If you switch off the ignition while driving, In Canada safety-relevant functions are only available Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, European Delivery Department for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably 98 Vanderhoof Avenue more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Sports Utility Vehicle G WARNING G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle twigs may ignite if they come into contact with may start to skid and roll over in the event of hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when of fire. Introduction 27

When driving off road or on unpaved roads, parts of the exhaust system, they can catch check the vehicle's underside regularly. In fire. particular, remove parts of plants or other In such situations, have the vehicle flammable materials which have become checked and repaired immediately at a trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. If on con- qualified specialist workshop. tinuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the G WARNING vehicle immediately, paying attention to Modifications to electronic components, their road and traffic conditions. In such cases, software as well as wiring can impair their visit a qualified specialist workshop. function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a Declarations of conformity result, these may no longer function as inten- Vehicle components which receive ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of and/or transmit radio waves the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper- tronic components or their software. You ation is subject to the following two condi- should have all work to electrical and elec- tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified ful interference, and 2) These devices must specialist workshop. accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired oper- If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- ation. Changes or modifications not expressly tronics, the general operating permit is ren- approved by the party responsible for com- dered invalid. pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle R the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high comply with Industry Canada license-exempt curb or an unpaved road RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a following two conditions: (1) These devices curb or a hole in the road may not cause interference, and (2) These Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage devices must accept any interference, includ- or parts of the chassis ing interference that may cause undesired In situations like this, the body, the under- operation of the device." carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this Diagnostics connection way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of The diagnostics connection is only intended an accident, no longer withstand the strain for the connection of diagnostic equipment at they are designed to. a qualified specialist workshop. If the underbody paneling is damaged, G WARNING combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the If you connect equipment to the diagnostics underbody and the underbody paneling. If connection in the vehicle, it may affect the these materials come in contact with hot operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,

Z 28 Introduction

the operating safety of the vehicle could be Ralterations, installation work and modifica- affected. There is a risk of an accident. tions Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos- Rwork on electronic components tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNING Correct use Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the If you remove any warning stickers, you or pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. others could fail to recognize certain dangers. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is Leave warning stickers in position. jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the following information when driv- Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are ing your vehicle: stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter Rthe safety notes in this manual the driver's footwell. Install the floormats R securely and as specified in order to ensure the Technical Data section in this manual sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use Rtraffic rules and regulations loose floormats and do not place floormats on Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to top of one another. motor vehicles

! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is Problems with your vehicle used, the starter battery may discharge. If you should experience a problem with your Connecting equipment to the diagnostics vehicle, particularly one that you believe may connection can lead to emissions monitoring affect its safe operation, we urge you to con- information being reset, for example. This tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the immediately to have the problem diagnosed requirements of the next emissions test dur- and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to ing the main inspection. your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses. Qualified specialist workshop In the USA An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a Customer Assistance Center qualified specialist workshop. It has the nec- Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali- One Mercedes Drive fications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 case for work relevant to safety. In Canada Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- Customer Relations Department let. Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Always have the following work carried out at 98 Vanderhoof Avenue an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Reporting safety defects Rrepair work USA only: Introduction 29

The following text is published as required of information about the performance or status manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. of various systems, including but not limited Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the to, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys- "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act tems, that is stored and can be read out with of 1966". suitable devices, particularly when the vehi- If you believe that your vehicle has a defect cle is serviced. The data obtained is used to which could cause a crash or could cause properly diagnose and service your vehicle or injury or death, you should immediately to further optimize and develop vehicle func- inform the National Highway Traffic Safety tions. Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify- ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s may order a recall and remedy campaign. operation, the use of the vehicle in certain However, NHTSA cannot become involved in situations, and the location of the vehicle may individual problems between you, your be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. system. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle For additional information please refer to the Safety Hotline toll-free at COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go Terms and Conditions. to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. Event data recorders You can also obtain other information about This vehicle is equipped with an event data motor vehicle safety from recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR http://www.safercar.gov is to record data that will assist in under- standing how a vehicle’s systems performed in certain crash or near crash-like situations, Limited Warranty such as during air bag deployment or when ! Follow the instructions in this manual hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed about the proper operation of your vehicle to record data related to vehicle dynamics as well as about possible vehicle damage. and safety systems for a short period of time, Damage to your vehicle that arises from typically 30 seconds or less. culpable contraventions against these The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record instructions is not covered either by the such data as: Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the Rhow various systems in your vehicle are New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. operating Rwhether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened Data stored in the vehicle Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the Data recording accelerator and/or brake pedal and R This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic how fast the vehicle is traveling information relating to vehicle operation, mal- This data can help provide a better under- functions, and user settings. This may include standing of the circumstances in which

Z 30 Introduction

crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is Information on copyright recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by General information the EDR under normal driving conditions and Information on license for free and open- no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, source software used in your vehicle and its and crash location) are recorded. However, electronic components is available on the fol- other parties, such as law enforcement, can lowing website: combine the EDR data with the type of per- http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ sonal identification data routinely acquired opensource during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per- sonnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp- ted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. 31

Cockpit ...... 32 Instrument cluster ...... 33 Multifunction steering wheel ...... 35 Center console ...... 36 Overhead control panel ...... 38 Door control panel ...... 39 At a glance 32 Cockpit

Cockpit At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Steering wheel paddle D Climate control systems 126 shifters 153 E Ignition lock 143 ; Combination switch 112 F Adjusts the steering wheel 102 = Instrument cluster 33 G Cruise control lever 172 ? Horn H Electric parking brake 160 A DIRECT SELECT lever 148 I Light switch 110 B PARKTRONIC warning dis- J play 186 Diagnostics connection 27 K C Overhead control panel 38 Opens the hood 292 Instrument cluster 33

Instrument cluster Displays and controls At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Speedometer with seg- ? Coolant temperature 204 ments 205 A Fuel gage ; Multifunction display 206 B Instrument cluster lighting 204 = Tachometer 205 34 Instrument cluster

Warning and indicator lamps At a glance

Function Page Function Page : L Low-beam head- G M SPORT handling lamps 111 mode in AMG vehicles 257 ; T Parking lamps 112 H ? Coolant 260 = K High-beam head- I R Rear fog lamp 112 lamps 112 J N Front fog lamps 111 ? ÷ ESP® 256 K ; Check Engine 260 A Electric parking brake (red) L h Tire pressure monitor 263 F (USA only) ! (Canada only) 259 M æ Reserve fuel 260 B ! Electric parking brake N å ESP® OFF 256 (yellow) 259 O ! ABS 254 C · Distance warning 262 P Brakes 254 D #! Turn signals 112 $ (USA only) J E 6 Restraint system 42 (Canada only) F ü Seat belt 252 Multifunction steering wheel 35

Multifunction steering wheel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Multifunction display 206 A =; ; Audio/COMAND display; Selects a menu 205 see the separate operating 9: instructions Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists 205 = ? a Switches on the Voice Con- Confirms your selection 205 trol System; see the separate operating instructions Hides display messages 221 ? ~ B % Rejects or ends a call 211 Back 205 Exits phone book/redial Switches off the Voice Con- memory trol System; see the sepa- 6 rate operating instructions Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute 36 Center console

Center console Center console, upper section At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Audio system/COMAND; B £ Hazard warning see the separate operating lamps 113 instructions C PASSENGER AIR BAG indi- ; c Seat heating 100 cator lamp 43 = Ã Downhill Speed Reg- D Ú Selects the drive pro- ulation 184 gram 152 ® ? c PARKTRONIC 186 å AMG vehicles: ESP 70 Ç A ¤ ECO start/stop func- E Off-road program 186 tion 145 Center console 37

Center console, lower section At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Ashtray 275 ? Stowage compartment with Cigarette lighter 276 Media Interface 267 Socket 276 A Audio/COMAND control- Stowage compartment 267 ler; see the separate operating instructions ; Stowage compartment 267 = Cup holder 273 38 Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : u Switches the rear D G SOS button (mbrace compartment interior light- system) 278 ing on/off 116 E F Roadside Assistance ; p Switches the right- call button (mbrace sys- hand reading lamp on/off 115 tem) 280 = | Switches the front F Eyeglasses compartment 267 interior lighting/automatic G 3 interior lighting control off 116 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power ? ï MB Info call button tilt/sliding panel with roller (mbrace system) 280 sunblinds 91 A Rear-view mirror 103 H c Switches the front interior lighting on 116 B Sets the compass 289 I p Switches the left- C Buttons for the garage door hand reading lamp on/off 115 opener 288 Door control panel 39

Door control panel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 81 B W Opens/closes the side windows 87 ; %&Unlocks/locks the vehicle 82 C n Activates/deactivates the override feature = r45= Saves for the side windows in the the seat and exterior mirror rear compartment 64 settings 106 ? Adjusts the seats electrically 98 A 7 Z ö \ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 103 40 41

Useful information ...... 42 Panic alarm ...... 42 Occupant safety ...... 42 Children in the vehicle ...... 58 Pets in the vehicle ...... 64 Driving safety systems ...... 64

Protection against theft ...... 72 Safety 42 Occupant safety

Useful information reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. i This Operator's Manual describes all The restraint system comprises: models and all standard and optional equip- RSeat belt system ment of your vehicle available at the time of RAir bags publication of the Operator's Manual. R Country-specific differences are possible. Child restraint system Please note that your vehicle may not be RChild seat securing systems Safety equipped with all features described. This The components of the restraint system work also applies to safety-related systems and in conjunction with each other. They can only functions. deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 45) Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint Panic alarm properly (Y page 97). As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 96). You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 48). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the X To activate: press ! button : for at protection offered by the seat belt is suffi- least one second. cient, the air bags are not deployed. When an An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting accident occurs, only the air bags that flashes. increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts X To deactivate: ! : press button and air bags generally do not protect against again. objects penetrating the vehicle from the out- or side. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emer- gency Tensioning Device and air bags" Occupant safety (Y page 56). Restraint system: introduction For more information about children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint The restraint system reduces the risk of vehi- systems, see "Children in the vehicle" cle occupants coming into contact with parts (Y page 58). of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also Occupant safety 43

Important safety notes vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer- gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam- G WARNING ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or Modifications to the restraint system may even fatal injury. cause it to no longer work as intended. The Have the restraint system checked and restraint system may then not perform its repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as intended protective function and may fail in an soon as possible. accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even Safety fatal injury. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : The functions of the restraint system are and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator checked after the ignition is switched on and lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classifica- at regular intervals while the engine is run- tion System (OCS). ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec- The indicator lamps display the status of the ted in good time. front-passenger front air bag. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON : lights up: the the instrument cluster lights up when the igni- front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a in the event of an accident, all deployment few seconds after the engine is started. The criteria are met, the front-passenger front components of the restraint system are in air bag is deployed. operational readiness. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; lights up: the A malfunction has occurred if the 6 front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- restraint system warning lamp: ted. It will then not be deployed in the event Rdoes not light up after the ignition is of an accident. switched on Depending on the person in the front- Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with passenger seat, the front-passenger front air the engine running bag must either be disabled or enabled; see Rlights up again while the engine is running the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. G WARNING If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of

Z 44 Occupant safety

Seat belts accident, which will then need to be replaced. Introduction Seat belts are the most effective means of Important safety notes restricting the movement of vehicle occu- The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- pants in the event of an accident or the vehi- tems is required by law in: cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi- R cle occupants coming into contact with parts all 50 states Safety of the vehicle interior or being ejected from Rthe U.S. territories the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps Rthe District of Columbia to keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi- Rall Canadian provinces tion in relation to the air bag. Even where this is not required by law, all The seat belt system comprises: vehicle occupants should correctly fasten RSeat belts their seat belts before starting the journey. REmergency Tensioning Devices for the G WARNING front seat belts and the outer seat belts in If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can- the rear not protect as intended. Furthermore, an RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi- belts and the outer seat belts in the rear tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur- If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet ing braking or when abruptly changing direc- quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be even fatal injury. extracted any further. Make sure that all vehicle occupants are The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens seated properly with a correctly fastened seat the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt belt. close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction G WARNING of the backrest. The seat belt does not offer the intended level The Emergency Tensioning Device does not of protection if you have not moved the back- correct an incorrect seat position or the rout- rest to an almost vertical position. When braking of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. ing or in the event of an accident, you could When triggered, seat belt force limiters help slide underneath the seat belt and sustain to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This the vehicle occupant. poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal The seat belt force limiters for the front seats injury. are synchronized with the front air bags, Adjust the seat properly before beginning which absorb part of the deceleration force. your journey. Always ensure that the backrest This can reduce the force exerted on the vehi- is in an almost vertical position and that the cle occupants during an accident. shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle G WARNING of the front-passenger seat. This may oth- Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer- fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- gency Tensioning Device in the event of an tional suitable restraint system. If the seat Occupant safety 45

belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas- sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for reels. Make sure that the seat belts are example, in an accident, during braking or an undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- abrupt change of direction. This poses an ing an accident, have the seat belts checked increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. immediately at a qualified specialist work- For this reason, always secure persons under shop. 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint Safety systems. Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any such If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft modifications could invalidate the vehicle's (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: general operating permit. Vehicles with a sports seat or AMG Per- Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz formance seat: these seats are designed for vehicle. The child restraint system must be the standard three-point seat belt. If you appropriate to the age, weight and size of install another multipoint seat belt, e.g. sport the child or racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide the best level of protection. Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec- G WARNING tion of this Operator's Manual If you feed seat belts through the opening in (Y page 58) in addition to the child the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be restraint system manufacturer's installa- damaged or may even break in the event of an tion instructions accident. This poses an increased risk of Rbe sure to observe the instructions and injury or even fatal injury. safety notes on the "Occupant classifica- Only use the standard three-point seat belt. tion system (OCS)" (Y page 51) Never modify the seat belt system. G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended Proper use of the seat belts protective function if: Observe the safety notes on the seat belt Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely (Y page 44). dirty, bleach or dyed All vehicle occupants must be wearing the Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or seat belt correctly before beginning the jour- extremely dirty ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu- Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt pants are always wearing the seat belt cor- anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- rectly while the vehicle is in motion. fied When fastening the seat belt, always make Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, sure that: although the damage may not be visible, e.g. Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged belt buckle belonging to that seat. seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy coat. when necessary. This poses an increased risk R of injury or even fatal injury. the seat belt is not twisted.

Z 46 Occupant safety

Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Where possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate Safety height. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using X Adjust the seat (Y page 96). the shoulder section of the belt. The seat backrest must be in an almost R the seat belt is not routed across sharp, vertical position. pointed or fragile objects. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet If you have such items located on or in your =. clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, X Engage seat belt tongue ; in belt store these in a suitable place. buckle :. Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder time. section of the seat belt to tighten the belt Infants and children must never travel sit- across your body. ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 266).

Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 45). Occupant safety 47

The shoulder section of the seat belt must X Press release button :, hold belt always be routed across the center of the tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. belt outlet =. X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards. The belt outlet will engage in various posi- Belt warning for the driver and front tions. passenger X To lower: hold belt outlet release : and The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-

slide the belt outlet downwards. ment cluster is a reminder that all occupants Safety X Let go of belt outlet release : in the must fasten their seat belts. It may light up desired position and make sure that the continuously or flash. In addition, there may belt outlet engages. be a warning tone. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt equipped with a special seat belt retractor to has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt securely fasten child restraint systems in the warning lamp lights up for six seconds each vehicle. Further information can be found time the engine is started. If, after under "Special seat belt retractor" six seconds, the driver or front-passenger (Y page 59). seat belt has not been fastened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp Releasing seat belts lights up again. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue warning lamp goes out. will be trapped in the door or in the seat If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after mechanism. This could damage the door, the engine is started, an additional warning the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- tone will sound. This warning tone stops after aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is protective function and must be replaced. fastened. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and front- passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. The warning tone sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" (Y page 252).

Z 48 Occupant safety

Air bags ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully Introduction deployed. The installation point of an air bag can be rec- RAlways lean against the backrest while driv- ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against An air bag complements the correctly fas- the door or side window. You may other- tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat wise be in the deployment area of the air bags.

Safety belt. The air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the The different air bag systems function inde- dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth- pendently from one another (Y page 56). erwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. However, no system available today can com- R pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. For this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury systems. Up to this height, the seat belt caused by an air bag due to the high speed at cannot be worn correctly. which the air bag must be deployed. If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also Important safety notes observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under 12 years of G WARNING age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in If you do not sit in the correct seat position, suitable child restraint systems. the air bag cannot protect as intended and RChild restraint systems should be installed could even cause additional injury when on the rear seats. deployed. This poses an increased risk of ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing injury or even fatal injury. child restraint system on the front- To avoid hazardous situations, always make passenger seat when the front-passenger sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: front air bag is deactivated. If the Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is including pregnant women permanently lit, the front-passenger front Y Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great- air bag is deactivated ( page 43). est possible distance to the air bags RAlways observe the instructions and safety Rfollow the following instructions notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys- tem (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children Always make sure that there are no objects in the vehicle" (Y page 58) in addition to between the air bag and the vehicle's occu- the child restraint system manufacturer's pants. installation instructions. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. Occupant safety 49

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre- Front air bags vent the air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Safety Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are steering wheel; front-passenger front air attached to the vehicle within the deploy- bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side box. windows, rear side trim or side walls. When deployed, the front air bags offer addi- Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects tional head and thorax protection for the are in the pockets of your clothing. Store occupants in the front seats. such objects in a suitable place. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and G WARNING PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects inform you about the status of the front- such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer passenger front air bag (Y page 43). function correctly. There is an increased risk Front-passenger front air bag ; will only of injury. deploy if: Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen- to it. sor readings, detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied (Y page 51). G WARNING The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator Sensors to control the air bags are located in lamp is lit (Y page 51) the doors. Modifications or work not per- Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a formed correctly to the doors or door panel- high accident severity ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air Knee bags bags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 50 Occupant safety

Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steer- In the event of a side impact, the side impact ing column and front-passenger knee bag ; air bag is deployed on the side on which the under the glove box. The driver's and front- impact occurs. passenger knee bags are triggered together The side impact air bag on the front- with the front air bags. passenger side (front) deploys in the follow- The driver's and front-passenger knee bags ing situations: offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro- Rthe OCS system detects that the front- tection for the occupants in the front seats.

Safety passenger seat is occupied or R Side impact air bags the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat G WARNING If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even buckle, the side impact air bag on the front- prevent the deployment of the air bags inte- passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci- grated into the seats. Consequently, the air dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy- bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as ment is independent of whether the front- they are designed to do. In addition, the func- passenger seat is occupied or not. tion of the Occupant Classification System (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an Window curtain air bags increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.

Window curtain air bags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. Front side impact air bags : and rear side However, it does not protect the chest or impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer arms. bolster of the seat backrest. In the event of a side impact, the window cur- When deployed, the side impact air bag offers tain air bag is deployed on the side on which additional thorax protection. It also offers the impact occurs. additional pelvis protection for occupants in the front seats. However, it does not protect If the system determines that they can offer the: additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be R head deployed in other accident situations Rneck (Y page 56). Rarms Occupant safety 51

Occupant Classification System rest and the head restraint position accord- (OCS) ingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function Introduction correctly. Always observe the child restraint The Occupant Classification System (OCS) system manufacturer's installation instruc- categorizes the person in the front-passenger tions. seat. Depending on that result, the front- passenger front air bag and front-passenger Occupant Classification System opera- Safety knee bag are either enabled or deactivated. tion (OCS) The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

Prerequisites To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp back against the seat backrest ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi- The indicator lamps inform you whether the ble front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or If the front passenger does not observe these enabled. conditions, OCS may produce a false classi- X fication, e.g. because the front passenger: Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in R transfers their weight by supporting them- the ignition lock. selves on a vehicle armrest The system carries out self-diagnostics. Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and from the seat cushion PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps If it is absolutely necessary to install a child must light up simultaneously for approx- restraint system on the front-passenger seat, imately six seconds. be sure to observe the correct positioning of The indicator lamps display the status of the the child restraint system. Never place front-passenger front air bag. objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON : lights up: the child restraint system must always rest on the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The in the event of an accident, all deployment backrest of the forwards-facing child restraint criteria are met, the front-passenger front system must, as far as possible, be resting on air bag is deployed. the backrest of the front-passenger seat. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; lights up: the The child restraint system must not touch the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- roof or be put under strain by the head ted. It will then not be deployed in the event restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back- of an accident.

Z 52 Occupant safety

If the status of the front-passenger front air Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR air bag display message appears in the instru- BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. ment cluster (Y page 233). When the front- passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamps. Be BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install aware of the status of the front-passenger a rearward-facing child restraint system on Safety front air bag both before and during the jour- the front-passenger seat. You can find more ney. information on OCS under "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" G WARNING (Y page 55). If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is G WARNING disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of If you secure a child in a forward-facing child an accident and cannot perform its intended restraint system on the front-passenger seat protective function. A person in the front- and you position the front-passenger seat too passenger seat could then, for example, come close to the dashboard, in the event of an into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- accident, the child could: cially if the person is sitting too close to the Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte- dashboard. This poses an increased risk of rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- injury or even fatal injury. cator lamp is lit, for example When the front-passenger seat is occupied, Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER always ensure that: AIR BAG ON is lit up Rthe classification of the person in the front- This poses an increased risk of injury or even passenger seat is correct and the front- fatal injury. passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- Move the front-passenger seat as far back as bled in accordance with the person in the possible. Always make sure that the shoulder front-passenger seat belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the back as far back as possible. child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap Rthe person is seated correctly. must be routed forwards and downwards Make sure, both before and during the jour- from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, ney, that the status of the front-passenger adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front- front air bag is correct. passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's G WARNING installation instructions. If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child If OCS determines that: restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the lamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bag PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may deploy in an accident. The child could be lights up after the system self-test and struck by the air bag. This poses an increased remains lit. This indicates that the front- risk of injury or even fatal injury. passenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to 12 months old in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR Occupant safety 53

BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the accident. Have the system checked by quali- system self-test and remains lit. This indi- fied technicians as soon as possible. Consult cates that the front-passenger front air bag an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The is deactivated. front-passenger seat should only be repaired But in the case of a 12-month-old child in a at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. standard child restraint system, the If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up per- the seat cushion is damaged, have the nec- manently after the system self-test. This essary repair work carried out at an author- indicates that the front-passenger front air ized Mercedes-Benz Center. Safety bag is activated. The result of the classifi- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- cation is dependent on, among other fac- mends that you only use seat accessories tors, the child restraint system and the that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. child's stature. It is recommended that you If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not install the restraint system on a suitable mean that the front-passenger front air bag rear seat. will also deploy. The Occupant Classification Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager front-passenger seat. Depending on that or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR result, the front-passenger front air bag is BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- either enabled or deactivated. cator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the System self-test result of the classification. G - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator DANGER lamp lights up, move the front-passenger If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and seat as far back as possible. Alterna- PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do tively, a person of smaller stature can sit not light up during the system self-test, the on a rear seat. system is malfunctioning. The front- - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator passenger front air bag might be triggered lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature unintentionally or might not be triggered at all should not use the front-passenger seat. in the event of an accident with high deceler- Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or adult or a person of a stature correspond- even fatal injury. ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR In this case the front-passenger seat may not BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the be used. Do not install a child restraint system system self-test and remains lit. This indi- on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu- cates that the front-passenger front air bag pant Classification System (OCS) checked is activated. and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure cialist workshop. to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi- G DANGER cle" (Y page 58). When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6 If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator restraint system warning lamp in the instru- lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. not be deployed in the event of an accident. In The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- this case, the front-passenger front air bag ted in this case and does not deploy during an cannot perform its intended protective func-

Z 54 Occupant safety

tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front- After the system self-test, the PASSENGER passenger seat. AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON That person could, for example, come into indicator lamp display the status of the front- Y contact with the vehicle's interior, especially passenger front air bag ( page 51). if the person is sitting too close to the dash- For more information about the OCS, see board. This poses an increased risk of injury or "Problems with the Occupant Classification even fatal injury. System" (Y page 55).

Safety When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the front- passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front- passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi- cation System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards- facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Occupant safety 55

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 53). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is BAG OFF indicator incorrect. lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per- remains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 51). Safety though the front- X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the passenger seat is occu- front-passenger seat may not be used. pied by an adult or a X person of a stature cor- Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized responding to that of an Mercedes-Benz Center. adult. The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning. BAG OFF indicator X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the lamp does not light up child seat. and/or does not stay X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on. on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of The front-passenger the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as pos- seat is: sible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If nec- Runoccupied essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. Roccupied by the X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the weight of a child up seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front- to 12 months old in a passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and child restraint sys- the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. tem X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/ or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the restraint system on a suitable rear seat. X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Z 56 Occupant safety

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning people with asthma or other respiratory prob- Devices and air bags lems. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it Important safety notes is safe to do so. G WARNING Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension- ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate- The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has rial, which may require special handling and been deployed. There is a risk of injury. regard for the environment. National guide- Safety Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a lines must be observed during disposal. In deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ cialist workshop as soon as possible. HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm. G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- Method of operation tection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased During the first stage of a collision, the risk of injury. restraint system control unit evaluates impor- Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler- ist workshop in order to have a deployed air ation or acceleration, such as: bag replaced. Rduration Rdirection It is important for your safety and that of your Rintensity passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags Based on the evaluation of this data, the repaired. This will help to make sure the air restraint system control unit deploys the bags continue to perform their protective Emergency Tensioning Devices during a fron- function for the vehicle occupants in the tal or rear collision. event of a crash. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be deployed, if: G WARNING Rthe ignition is switched on Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices R that have been deployed are no longer opera- the components of the restraint system are tional and are unable to perform their inten- operational; see "Restraint system warning ded protective function. This poses an lamp" (Y page 43) increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- the respective front-passenger seat sioning Devices which have been triggered The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the immediately replaced at a qualified specialist rear compartment are deployed independ- workshop. ently of the lock status of the seat belts.

If Emergency Tensioning Devices or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in Occupant safety 57

If the restraint system control unit detects a nor do they provide an indication of air bag more severe accident, further components of deployment. the restraint system are activated independ- The vehicle can be deformed considerably, ently of each other in certain frontal collision without an air bag being deployed. This is the situations: case if only parts which are relatively easily RFront air bags as well as driver's and front- deformed are affected and the rate of decel- passenger knee bags eration is not high. Conversely, air bags may R be deployed even though the vehicle suffers

Window curtain air bag, if the system deter- Safety mines that deployment can offer additional only minor deformation. This is the case if, for protection to that provided by the seat belt example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient The front-passenger front air bag is activated deceleration occurs as a result. or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The front- If the restraint system control unit detects a passenger front air bag can only deploy in an side impact or that the vehicle is rolling over, accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi- the relevant restraint system components are cator lamp is lit. Observe the information on activated independently of one another the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps depending on the apparent type of accident. (Y page 43). If the system determines a need for additional protection for the vehicle occupants, the Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. Emergency Tensioning Devices are deployed. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce RSide impact air bags on the side of impact, the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully independently of the Emergency Tension- deployed with the maximum amount of pro- ing Device and the use of the seat belt on pellant gas if a second deployment threshold the driver's seat and outer seats in the sec- is reached within a few milliseconds. ond row The deployment threshold of the Emergency The side impact air bag on the front- Tensioning Devices and the air bag are deter- passenger side (front) deploys in the fol- mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel- lowing situations: eration or acceleration which occurs at vari- - the OCS system detects that the front- ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre- passenger seat is occupied or emptive in nature. Deployment should take - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt place in good time at the start of the collision. buckle of the front-passenger seat The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- RWindow curtain air bag on the side of tion and the direction of the force are essen- impact, independently of the use of the tially determined by: seat belt and independently of whether the Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- front-passenger seat is occupied sion RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and Rthe collision angle front-passenger side in certain situations Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- when the vehicle rolls over, if the system cle determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the Rthe characteristics of the object with which seat belt the vehicle has collided i Factors which can only be seen and measured Not all air bags are deployed in an acci- after a collision has occurred do not play a dent. The different air bag systems work decisive role in the deployment of an air bag, independently of each other.

Z 58 Children in the vehicle

How the air bag system works is deter- the child restraint system manufacturer's mined by the severity of the accident detec- installation instructions ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or Rbe sure to observe the instructions and acceleration and the apparent type of acci- safety notes on the "Occupant classifica- dent: tion system (OCS)" (Y page 51) R frontal collision G WARNING R side impact If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- R Safety rollover cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Automatic measures after an acci- Rshift the automatic transmission out of the dent parking position P. Rstart the engine. Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- the type and severity of the impact: ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated When leaving the vehicle, always take the R the emergency lighting is activated SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rthe front side windows are lowered G Rthe engine is switched off WARNING Rthe fuel supply is cut off If persons, particularly children are subjected Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer- to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or gency call cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Children in the vehicle G WARNING Important safety notes If the child restraint system is subjected to Accident statistics show that children direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- secured in the rear seats are safer than children may burn themselves on these parts, dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For particularly on the metal parts of the child this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises restraint system. There is a risk of injury. that you install a child restraint system on a If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with rear seat. Children are generally better pro- you, always ensure that the child restraint tected there. system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the R always secure the child in a child restraint child in it. Never leave children unattended in system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi- the vehicle. cles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have the child their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit- Rbe sure to observe the instructions and ting properly. Particular attention must be safety notes in this section in addition to paid to children. Children in the vehicle 59

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt Activating the special seat belt retractor: Y ( page 44) and the notes on correct use of X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia Y seat belts ( page 45). reel retract it again. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve While the seat belt is retracting, you should proper seat belt positioning for children over hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat 41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a height belt retractor is activated. where a lap/shoulder belt can be fastened X Push the child seat restraint system down properly without a booster seat.

so that the seat belt is tight and does not Safety loosen. Special seat belt retractor Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor: G WARNING X Always comply with the child restraint sys- If the seat belt is released while driving, the tem manufacturer's installation instruc- child restraint system will no longer be tions. secured properly. The special seat belt retrac- X Press the release button on the belt buckle, tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot towards the belt outlet. be immediately refastened. There is an The special seat belt retractor is deactiva- increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. ted. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the Child restraint system child restraint system properly. The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are tems is required by law in: equipped with a special seat belt retractor. Rall 50 states When activated, the special seat belt retrac- R tor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken the U.S. territories once the child restraint system has been Rthe District of Columbia secured. Rall Canadian provinces Installing a child restraint system: You can obtain further information about the X Always comply with the child restraint sys- correct child restraint system from any tem manufacturer's installation instruc- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. tions. G WARNING X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt If the child restraint system is installed incor- outlet. rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt intended. The child cannot then be restrained buckle. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cush-

Z 60 Children in the vehicle

ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under i If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child or behind the child restraint system. Only use on the front-passenger seat, be sure to child restraint systems with the original cover observe the information on the "Occupant designed for them. Only replace damaged Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 51). covers with genuine covers. There you will also find information on deactivating the front-passenger front air G WARNING bag. If the child restraint system is installed incor- All child restraint systems must meet the fol- Safety rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in lowing standards: the event of an accident, heavy braking or a RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand- sudden change in direction. The child ards 213 and 225 restraint system could be thrown about, strik- R ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards risk of injury, possibly even fatal. 213 and 210.2 Always install child restraint systems prop- Confirmation that the child restraint system erly, even if they are not being used. Make corresponds to the standards can be found sure that you observe the child restraint sys- on an instruction label on the child restraint tem manufacturer's installation instructions. system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are inclu- You will find further information on stowing ded with the child restraint system. objects, luggage or loads under "Loading Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- guidelines" (Y page 266). rior and on the child restraint system. G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing sys- LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- tems which have been damaged or subjected ing system to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be G WARNING restrained in the event of an accident, heavy LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems braking or sudden changes of direction. There do not offer sufficient protective effect for is an increased risk of injury, possibly even children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs fatal. (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt Replace child restraint systems which have integrated in the child restraint system. In the been damaged or subjected to a load in an event of an accident, a child might not be accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- restrained correctly. This poses an increased ing systems on the child restraint system risk of injury or even fatal injury. checked at a qualified specialist workshop, If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), before you install a child restraint system only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint again. systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the Securing systems for the child restraint sys- child restraint system with the Top Tether tem are: belt, if available. Rthe seat belt system Always comply with the manufacturer's Rthe ISOFIX (LATCH-type) securing rings installation and operating instructions for the R the Top Tether anchorages child restraint system used. Children in the vehicle 61

Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH- Important safety notes type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is G engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO- WARNING FIX) securing rings If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective

function. Rear seat backrests that are not Safety locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr- : LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ests so that they are in an upright position. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child If the rear backrest is not engaged and restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO- locked, the red lock verification indicator will : FIX) securing rings . be visible (Y page 270). ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on Top Tether anchorages the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings : for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right rear seats. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install child seats according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether Introduction The Top Tether anchorages are located on the rear side of the rear seat backrests. Top Tether provides an additional connection between a child restraint system, secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount, and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used.

Z 62 Children in the vehicle

Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: Child restraint system on the front- X Move head restraint : upwards. passenger seat X Route Top Tether belt ? under head General notes restraint : between the two head restraint bars. Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than chil- Vehicles without adjustable head dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For restraints: this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises Safety X Top Tether belt with one belt strap: route that you install a child restraint system on a Top Tether belt ? centrally over head rear seat. restraint :. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child or restraint system to the front-passenger seat, X Top Tether belt with two belt straps: be sure to observe the instructions and safety route one Top Tether belt ? to the left and notes on the "Occupant classification system one to the right past the side of head (OCS)" (Y page 51). restraint :. You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: All vehicles: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child front-passenger seat restraint system with Top Tether. Always R comply with the child restraint system the unintentional deactivation of the front- manufacturer's installation instructions passenger front air bag when doing so. Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash- belt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;. board Make sure that: Rearward-facing child restraint system RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ; as shown. If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted. front-passenger seat, always make sure that R Top Tether belt ? is routed between the the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- rear seat backrest and the cargo com- ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF partment cover if the cargo compart- indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 43) ment cover is installed. is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva- X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always comply ted. with the child restraint system manufactur- Always observe the child restraint system er's installation instructions when doing so. manufacturer's installation and operating Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: instructions. X Move head restraint : back down again Forward-facing child restraint system slightly if necessary (Y page 100). Make sure that you do not interfere with the cor- If it is absolutely necessary to install a rect routing of Top Tether belt ?. forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front- passenger seat as far back as possible. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front- Children in the vehicle 63 passenger seat. The backrest of the child G WARNING restraint system must, as far as possible, lie If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- flat against the backrest of the front- cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: passenger seat. The child restraint system R must not touch the roof or be put under strain release the parking brake. by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the Rshift the automatic transmission out of the seat backrest and the head restraint position parking position P. accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul- Rstart the engine. Safety der belt strap is correctly routed from the In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt ment and become trapped. There is a risk of guide on the child restraint system. The shoul- an accident and injury. der belt strap must be routed forwards and When leaving the vehicle, always take the downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. G WARNING Always observe the child restraint system If persons, particularly children are subjected manufacturer's installation and operating to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or instructions. cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the Child-proof locks vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to G WARNING direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- If children are traveling in the vehicle, they dren may burn themselves on these parts, could: particularly on the metal parts of the child Ropen doors, thus endangering other people restraint system. There is a risk of injury. or road users If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming you, always ensure that the child restraint traffic system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- Roperate vehicle equipment and become tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child trapped restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the There is a risk of an accident and injury. child in it. Never leave children unattended in Always activate the child-proof locks and the vehicle. override feature if children are traveling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for: Rthe rear doors (Y page 64) Rthe rear side windows (Y page 64)

Z 64 Driving safety systems

Child-proof locks for the rear doors Pets in the vehicle

G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could:

Safety Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users You secure each door individually with the Unsecured animals could also be flung around child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- secured with a child-proof lock cannot be den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi- opened from inside the vehicle. When the cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened and injury. from the outside. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- X To activate: press the child-proof lock cle. Always secure animals properly during lever up in the direction of arrow :. the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans- X Make sure that the child-proof locks are port box. working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock Driving safety systems lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Overview of driving safety systems Override feature for the rear side win- In this section, you will find information about dows the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 65) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 65) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (distance warning function and adaptive Brake Assist) (Y page 66) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 68) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 72) X To activate/deactivate: press button :. RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72) If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 72) rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, oper- Important safety notes ation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. If you fail to adapt your driving style or become distracted, the driving safety sys- Driving safety systems 65 tems can neither reduce the risk of accident Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- nor override the laws of physics. Driving diately at a qualified specialist workshop. safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the dis- When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed including driving safety systems, will also and for braking in good time. Always adapt become inoperative. Observe the information your driving style to suit the prevailing road, on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 254) and weather and traffic conditions and maintain a display messages which may be shown in the safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive instrument cluster (Y page 222). Safety carefully. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph i The driving safety systems described only (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi- work as effectively as possible when there tions. ABS works on slippery roads, even if is adequate contact between the tires and you only brake gently. the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tires, recommen- Braking ded minimum tire tread depths etc. in the X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the Y "Wheels and tires" section ( page 324). brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit- In wintry driving conditions, always use uation is over. winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, X To make a full brake application: snow chains. Only in this way will the driv- depress the brake pedal with full force. ing safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) tion of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while General information driving. ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. Off-road ABS This allows you to continue steering the vehi- An ABS system specifically suited to off-road cle when braking. terrain is activated automatically once the off- The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument road program is activated (Y page 186). cluster lights up when the ignition is switched At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the front on. It goes out when the engine is running. wheels lock cyclically during braking. The digging-in effect achieved in the process reduces Important safety notes the stopping distance on off-road terrain. This i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- limits steering capability. tion for driving safety systems (Y page 64). G WARNING BAS (Brake Assist System) If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when General information braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Addition- BAS operates in emergency braking situa- ally, further driving safety systems are deac- tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- BAS automatically boosts the braking force, ding and accidents. thus shortening the stopping distance.

Z 66 Driving safety systems

Important safety notes Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- In particular, the detection of obstacles can tion (Y page 64). be impaired if: G WARNING Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance covering the sensors R in an emergency braking situation is there is snow or heavy rain increased. There is a risk of an accident. Rthere is interference by other radar sources Safety In an emergency braking situation, depress Rthere are strong radar reflections, for the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents example in parking garages the wheels from locking. Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Braking Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line R X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until new vehicles or after a service on the COL- the emergency braking situation is over. LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Observe the notes in the section on breaking-in (Y page 142). The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe- COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- PLUS sions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. General information Distance warning function COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an Important safety notes autonomous emergency braking function and i adaptive Brake Assist. Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 64). COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end G WARNING collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the The distance warning function does not react: effects of such a collision. Rto people or animals If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS R detects that there is a risk of a collision, you to oncoming vehicles R will be warned visually and acoustically. If you to crossing traffic do not react to the visual and audible collision Rwhen cornering warning, autonomous braking can be initiated Thus, the distance warning function cannot in critical situations. If you apply the brake provide a warning in all critical situations. yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION There is a risk of an accident. PREVENTION ASSIST system PLUS adaptive Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Brake Assist assists you. uation and be ready to brake. Driving safety systems 67

G WARNING cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an The distance warning function cannot always extended period of time. clearly identify objects and complex traffic Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), situations. the distance warning function can also react In such cases, the distance warning function to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or may: parked vehicles. If you approach an obstacle and the distance Rgive an unnecessary warning warning function detects a risk of a collision, R Safety not give a warning the system will initially alert you both visually There is a risk of an accident. and acoustically. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance Autonomous braking function warning function. If the driver does not react to the distance Function warning signal in a critical situation, COLLI- SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac- with the autonomous braking function. tivate the distance warning function in the on-board computer (Y page 214). The autonomous braking function: R If the distance warning function is not activa- gives the driver more time to react to criti- ted, the æ symbol appears in the assis- cal driving situations tance graphics display. Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or The distance warning function can help you to Rreduces the effects of an accident minimize the risk of a front-end collision with Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such autonomous braking function is available in a collision. If the distance warning function the following speed ranges: detects that there is a risk of a collision, you R5 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving will be warned visually and acoustically. objects Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), R5 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary the distance warning function warns you if objects you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: intermittent warning tone will then sound, the auton- and the · distance warning lamp will light omous braking function is available in the fol- up in the instrument cluster. lowing speed ranges: R X Brake immediately in order to increase the 5 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving distance from the vehicle in front. objects R or 5 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative Due to the nature of the system, particularly passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) complicated but non-critical driving condi- are activated simultaneously. tions may also cause the system to display a warning. Adaptive Brake Assist With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obsta- i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 64).

Z 68 Driving safety systems

G WARNING the brakes vigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly will automatically increase the braking force identify objects and complex traffic situa- to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. tions. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist may: emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Rintervene unnecessarily The brakes will work normally again if: Rnot intervene

Safety R There is a risk of an accident. you release the brake pedal. R Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- there is no longer any danger of a collision. uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the Rno obstacle is detected in front of your intervention in a non-critical driving situation. vehicle. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. G WARNING If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: high braking force, preventative passenger ® Rto people or animals protection measures (PRE-SAFE ) are activa- Rto oncoming vehicles ted simultaneously. Rto crossing traffic Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable Rwhen cornering of reacting to moving objects that have As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not already been recognized as such at least once intervene in all critical conditions. There is a over the period of observation. risk of an accident. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- (70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to uation and be ready to brake. stationary obstacles. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving condi- ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) tions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. General notes If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to i a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Y brake system remains available with full tion ( page 64). brake boosting effect and BAS. ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis- i.e. power transmission between the tires and tance in hazardous situations at speeds the road surface. above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating technology to assess the traffic situation. from the direction desired by the driver, one With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the or more wheels are braked to stabilize the distance warning signal can detect obstacles vehicle. The engine output is also modified to that are in the path of your vehicle for an keep the vehicle on the desired course within extended period of time. physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col- pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® lision with the vehicle in front, adaptive Brake can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. Assist calculates the necessary brake pressure to avoid this collision. Should you apply Driving safety systems 69

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 64). ! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with the front or rear axle raised. ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your they spin. This enables you to pull away and vehicle with the front axle raised, it is impor- ® accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example tant that you observe the notes on ESP if the road surface is slippery on one side. In (Y page 319). Safety addition, more drive torque is transferred to Vehicles with 4MATIC: when towing your the wheel or wheels with traction. vehicle with both axles on the ground, it is ETS remains active when you deactivate important that you observe the notes on ESP® ESP®. (Y page 319). ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF Off-road 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights tem) up continuously when the engine is running. ® A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-road If the ÷ ESP warning lamp and the å ® terrain is activated automatically once the off- ESP OFF warning lamp are lit continuously, road program is activated (Y page 186). ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps Important safety notes (Y page 256) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster G WARNING (Y page 222). If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to i Only use wheels with the recommended stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- ® ing safety systems are deactivated. This tire sizes. Only then will ESP function increases the risk of skidding and an accident. properly. ® Drive on carefully. Have ESP checked at a Characteristics of ESP® qualified specialist workshop. General information ! If you test the parking brake using a brake ÷ dynamometer, switch the ignition off. If the ESP warning lamp goes out before ® Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth- beginning the journey, ESP is automatically erwise destroy the brake system. active. ® ® ! If ESP intervenes, the ÷ ESP warning Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the igni- lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. tion when the electric parking brake is ® being tested on a brake dynamometer. If ESP intervenes: Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth- X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum- erwise destroy the brake system. stances. X ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per- Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as formance tests may only be carried out on necessary when pulling away. a 2-axle dynamometer. Before you operate X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail- the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please ing road and weather conditions. consult a qualified workshop. You could

Z 70 Driving safety systems

ECO start/stop function X To deactivate: (Y page 213). The ECO start/stop function switches the The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the engine off automatically when the vehicle instrument cluster lights up. stops moving. The engine starts automati- X To activate: (Y page 213). cally when the driver wants to pull away again. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the ESP® remains in its previously selected sta- instrument cluster goes out. tus. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before ® ®

Safety the engine was switched off, ESP remains Characteristics when ESP is deactivated deactivated when the engine is switched on If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels again. start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa- Deactivating/activating ESP® (except tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. AMG vehicles) If you deactivate ESP®: Important safety notes RESP® no longer improves driving stability. You can select between the following states Rengine torque is no longer limited and the ® of ESP : drive wheels are able to spin. RESP® is activated. The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- RESP® is deactivated. ting action for better traction on loose surfaces. G WARNING Rtraction control is still activated. ® ® If you deactivate ESP , ESP no longer sta- RESP® still provides support when you bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk brake. of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG bed in the following. vehicles)

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol- Important safety notes lowing situations: i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Rwhen using snow chains tion (Y page 64). Rin deep snow You can select between the following states Ron sand or gravel of ESP®: i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations RESP® is activated. described above no longer apply. ESP® will RSPORT handling mode is activated. otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi- RESP® is deactivated. cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. G WARNING ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and acci- extended period with ESP® deactivated. dents. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit- Deactivating/activating ESP® uations described in the following. You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer. Driving safety systems 71

G WARNING The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- X bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk To deactivate SPORT handling mode: of skidding and an accident. briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. bed in the following. X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until

In the following situations, it may be better to the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up Safety activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate in the instrument cluster. ® ESP : The ÷ OFF message appears in the mul- Rwhen using snow chains tifunction display. Rin deep snow X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. Ron sand or gravel The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the Ron designated roads when the vehicle's instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ® own oversteering and understeering char- ESP ON message appears in the multifunc- acteristics are desired tion display. Driving in SPORT handling mode or without Characteristics of activated SPORT han- ® ESP requires an extremely qualified and dling mode experienced driver. If SPORT handling mode is activated and one i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® described above no longer apply. ESP® will warning lamp in the instrument cluster otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi- flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel limited degree. starts to spin. When SPORT handling mode is activated: ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an RESP® only improves driving stability to a extended period with ESP® deactivated. limited degree. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Rtraction control is still activated. Deactivating/activating ESP® Rengine torque is only restricted to a limited degree, and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in X To activate SPORT handling mode: the instrument cluster does not flash. In such briefly press button :. situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Z 72 Protection against theft

If you deactivate ESP®: the brake system checked at a qualified spe- RESP® no longer improves driving stability. cialist workshop. R engine torque is no longer limited and the Observe information regarding indicator and drive wheels are able to spin. warning lamps (Y page 254) as well as dis- The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- play messages (Y page 224). ting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Safety Rtraction control is still activated. ADAPTIVE BRAKE RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety activated if you brake firmly and ESP® and offers increased braking comfort. In addi- intervenes. tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no lon- also has the HOLD function (Y page 181) and ger available; nor is it activated if you brake hill start assist (Y page 144). For further firmly with assistance from ESP®. information, see Driving tips (Y page 164). RESP® still provides support when you brake. STEER CONTROL Off-road ESP® General information An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a terrain is activated automatically once the off- noticeable steering force to the steering road program is activated (Y page 186). wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. Off-road ESP® intervenes with a delay if there is oversteering or understeering, thus improv- This steering assistance is provided in partic- ing traction. ular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you EBD (electronic brake force distribu- brake. tion) Rthe vehicle starts to skid. General information Important safety notes EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving No steering support is provided from STEER stability while braking. CONTROL, if: RESP® is malfunctioning. Important safety notes Rthe lighting is faulty. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Power steering will, however, continue to tion for driving safety systems (Y page 64). function. G WARNING If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can Protection against theft still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Immobilizer You should therefore adapt your driving style The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from to the different handling characteristics. Have being started without the correct SmartKey. Protection against theft 73

X To activate: remove the SmartKey from X To stop the alarm: insert the SmartKey the ignition lock. into the ignition lock. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. The alarm is switched off. When leaving the vehicle, always take the or SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The X Press the % or & button on the engine can be started by anyone with a valid SmartKey. SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. i The immobilizer is always deactivated The alarm is not switched off, even if you Safety when you start the engine. close the open door that triggered it, for example. In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), i If the alarm continues for more than the system is not operational. Contact an 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call system automatically notifies the Cus- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or tomer Assistance Center. This is done 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message provided that: ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available.

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the Smart- Key. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds. X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Ra door Rthe tailgate Rthe hood

Z 74 75

Useful information ...... 76 SmartKey ...... 76 Doors ...... 81 Cargo compartment ...... 83 Side windows ...... 87 Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel ...... 90 Opening and closing 76 SmartKey

Useful information Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before i This Operator's Manual describes all inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong publication of the Operator's Manual. magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote Country-specific differences are possible. control function could be affected. Please note that your vehicle may not be Strong magnetic fields can occur in the equipped with all features described. This vicinity of powerful electrical installations. also applies to safety-related systems and Do not keep the SmartKey: functions. Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile i Read the information on qualified special- phone or another SmartKey Y ist workshops ( page 28). Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil R SmartKey inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case

Opening and closing Important safety notes SmartKey functions G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of : & To lock the vehicle park position P ; F To open the tailgate RStart the engine. = % To unlock the vehicle There is a risk of an accident and injury. X To unlock centrally: press button =. When leaving the vehicle, always take the If you do not open the vehicle within approx- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never imately 40 seconds of unlocking: leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of Rthe vehicle is locked again. reach of children. Rprotection against theft is reactivated. X To lock centrally: press button :. G WARNING The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- Rthe doors tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could Rthe tailgate cause the engine to be switched off. There is a Rthe fuel filler flap risk of an accident. SmartKey 77

The turn signals flash once when unlocking Mechanical key and three times when locking. General notes i When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with computer (Y page 216). the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and i You can also set an audible signal to con- open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm firm that the vehicle has been locked. The system will be triggered (Y page 73). audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer There are several ways to turn off the alarm: (Y page 217). X Press the % or & button on the X To open the tailgate automatically: SmartKey. press button ; until the tailgate opens or (Y page 85). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked Changing the settings of the locking automatically.

system Opening and closing X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the You can change the settings of the locking SmartKey into the ignition lock. system. When you then unlock the vehicle only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap Removing the mechanical key are unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (Y page 78) flashes twice. i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove The SmartKey now functions as follows: mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. X To unlock the driver's door: press the For further information about: % button once. R Y X To unlock centrally: press the % but- unlocking the driver's door ( page 83) ton twice. Runlocking the cargo compartment Y X To lock centrally: press the & button. ( page 86) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 83) X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 78).

Z 78 SmartKey

Inserting the mechanical key The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Push mechanical key ; completely into X Y the SmartKey until it engages, and release Change the battery ( page 78). catch : is back in its basic position. i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: SmartKey battery Rlocks or Important safety notes Runlocks the vehicle G WARNING i You can get a battery at any qualified spe- Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- cialist workshop. ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal Replacing the battery injury. You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention Key (Y page 77).

Opening and closing immediately.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. X Press mechanical key ; into the opening Checking the battery in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery tray cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold cover : shut. X Remove battery tray cover :.

X Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. SmartKey 79

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants. X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover : and then press to close it. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 77). X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. Opening and closing

Z 80 SmartKey

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control using the SmartKey. function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. If this does not work: X Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary (Y page 78). X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control Opening and closing function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % / & button.

The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work- Key. shop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors 81

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low. started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 311). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 315). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be The steering lock is mechanically blocked. started using the X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While SmartKey. doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions. Opening and closing

Doors You should preferably place luggage or loads in the cargo compartment. Observe the load- Important safety notes ing guidelines (Y page 266). G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, Unlocking and opening doors from they could: the inside Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. X To unlock and open a front door: pull When leaving the vehicle, always take the door handle ;. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never If the door is locked, locking knob : pops leave children or animals unattended in the up. The door is unlocked and opens. vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking reach of children. knob :. The door is unlocked and can be opened. X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.

Z 82 Doors

You can open a door from inside the vehicle If a locked door is opened from the inside, the even if it has been locked. You can open the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they taken into consideration if: are secured by the child-proof lock Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking Y ( page 64). button for the central locking, or If the vehicle has previously been locked with Rif the vehicle was locked automatically the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre- will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside Centrally locking and unlocking the is unlocked. vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle Automatic locking feature from the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for example. Opening and closing

X To disarm: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To arm: press and hold button ; for about X To unlock: press button :. five seconds until a tone sounds. X To lock: press button ;. The vehicle locks when all the doors and i If you press one of the two buttons and do the tailgate are closed. not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. The vehicle is locked automatically when the You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from ignition is switched on and the wheels are the inside if the vehicle has been locked with turning. the SmartKey. You could therefore lock yourself out if: You can open a door from inside the vehicle Rthe vehicle is being pushed. even if it has been locked. You can open the Rthe vehicle is being towed. rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. are secured by the child-proof lock (Y page 64). You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board com- If the vehicle has previously been locked with puter (Y page 217). the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). Cargo compartment 83

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan- X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- ical key) Key (Y page 77). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the driver's door as far as it will go. the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 73). X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 77). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove Opening and closing it. X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate are locked. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 77). X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. i If you lock the vehicle as described above, The door is unlocked. the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti- X Turn the mechanical key back and remove theft alarm system is not armed. it. X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart- Key (Y page 77). Cargo compartment Important safety notes Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) G WARNING If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust SmartKey, use the mechanical key. gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particu- X Open the driver's door. larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes X Close the front-passenger door, the rear could enter the passenger compartment. doors and the tailgate. There is a risk of poisoning. X Press the locking button (Y page 82). Turn off the engine before opening the tail- X Check whether the locking knobs on the gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the knobs by hand, if necessary. rear when opened. Therefore, make sure X Close the driver's door. that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.

Z 84 Cargo compartment

i The opening dimensions of the tailgate If somebody becomes trapped: can be found in the "Vehicle data" section Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or (Y page 368). Rpress the remote operating switch on the You should preferably place luggage or loads driver’s door, or in the cargo compartment. Observe the load- Rpress the closing button/STOP button on ing guidelines (Y page 266). the trunk lid or Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com- Rpull on the trunk lid handle partment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The tailgate can be: Opening/closing from outside Ropened and closed manually from outside Opening Ropened/closed automatically from outside Ropened/closed automatically from inside X Press the % button on the SmartKey. Runlocked from inside with the mechanical key Opening and closing Tailgate obstruction detection with reversing feature On vehicles with tailgate remote closing feature, the tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle recognition with a reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when automatically opening or closing, this procedure is stopped. If the tailgate is stop- X Pull handle :. ped during the closing process, the tailgate X Raise the tailgate. automatically opens again slightly. The automatic obstacle recognition with reversing Closing function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the tailgate. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing movement This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these sit- X Pull the tailgate down using handle :. uations. There is a risk of injury. X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock. Make sure that no body parts are in close X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & proximity during the closing procedure. button on the SmartKey. Cargo compartment 85

Opening/closing automatically from X Press the F button on the SmartKey outside until the tailgate opens. or Important safety notes X If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle G WARNING and let it go again immediately. Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. More- Closing the tailgate automatically over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.

Rpress the remote operating switch on the Opening and closing driver’s door. X To close: press closing button ; on the R press the close button or STOP button on tailgate. the tailgate. X To stop the closing process: press STOP Rpull the handle on the tailgate. button : on the tailgate. G WARNING or X Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Pull the handle in the tailgate. gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate or is open when the engine is running, particu- X Press the F button on the SmartKey larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes until the tailgate opens again. could enter the passenger compartment. or There is a risk of poisoning. X Press the remote operating switch in the Turn off the engine before opening the tail- driver's door. gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the Opening/closing automatically from rear when opened. Therefore, make sure inside that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. Important safety notes i The opening dimensions of the tailgate G WARNING can be found in the "Vehicle data" section Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust (Y page 368). gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particu- Opening the tailgate automatically larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes You can open the tailgate automatically with could enter the passenger compartment. the SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate. There is a risk of poisoning.

Z 86 Cargo compartment

Turn off the engine before opening the tail- This could be useful, for example, if there is gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. insufficient space above the tailgate. ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the open the tailgate fully when setting the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise that there is sufficient clearance above and be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle behind the tailgate. outside. i The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section Activating (Y page 368). X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on Opening and closing the tailgate. X To stop the opening procedure at the desired position: press the closing button (Y page 85) in the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again. X To store the position: press and hold the

Opening and closing closing button in the tailgate until you hear a short tone. The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate will now stop in the stored position when opening. i To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle You can open and close the tailgate from the on the outside of the tailgate again after it driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary has stopped automatically. This does not and unlocked. delete the stored position. X To open: : pull remote operating switch Deactivating for the tailgate until the tailgate opens. X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 X Press and hold the closing button or 2 in the ignition lock. (Y page 85) in the tailgate until you hear two short tones. X Press remote operating switch : for the tailgate until the tailgate is completely closed. You will hear a warning tone during the Tailgate emergency release closing process. If the tailgate can no longer be opened from outside the vehicle, use the emergency release on the inside of the tailgate. Limiting the opening angle of the tail- ! gate The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure Important safety notes that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its i The opening dimensions of the tailgate opening range. can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 368). Side windows 87

You can reach the emergency release via the cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the cargo compartment. Fold the rear backrests vehicle. forward (Y page 270). X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 77). Side window reversing feature The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from traveling upwards during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window. X Insert mechanical key ; fully into the G

WARNING Opening and closing opening in trim :. The reversing feature does not react: X Turn mechanical key ; 90° clockwise. R X Push mechanical key ; in the direction of to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- the arrow and open the tailgate. gers Rwhile resetting i Y When you lock the vehicle ( page 83), This means that the reversing feature cannot the cargo compartment is also locked. prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Side windows Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If Important safety notes someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There Opening and closing the side win- is a risk of injury. dows When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody The switches for all side windows are located becomes trapped, release the switch or press on the driver's door. There is also a switch on the switch to open the side window again. each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take prec- G WARNING edence. If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-

Z 88 Side windows

Convenience opening You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle Ropen the side windows Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel and the roller sunblinds : Front left i The convenience opening feature can ; Front right only be operated using the SmartKey. The = Rear right SmartKey must be close to the driver's ? Rear left door handle. X Press and hold the % button until the i When the override feature for the side side windows and the panorama sunroof windows is activated (Y page 64), the side

Opening and closing are in the desired position. windows cannot be operated from the rear. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the ignition lock. roller sunblinds are opened first. X To open manually: press and hold the cor- X Press and hold the % button again until responding switch. the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding X To open fully: press the switch beyond the panel is in the desired position. point of resistance and release it. X To interrupt convenience opening: Automatic operation is started. release the % button. X To close manually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it. X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the Convenience closing feature point of resistance and release it. G WARNING Automatic operation is started. When the convenience closing feature is oper- X To interrupt automatic operation: ating, parts of the body could become trapped press/pull the corresponding switch again. in the closing area of the side window and the i If you press/pull the switch beyond the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. point of resistance, automatic operation is Observe the complete closing procedure started in the corresponding direction. You when the convenience closing feature is oper- can stop automatic operation by pressing/ ating. Make sure that no body parts are in pulling the switch again. close proximity during the closing procedure. i You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta- remove the SmartKey. This function is neously: available for up to five minutes or until the Rclose the side windows driver's or front-passenger door is opened. Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel Side windows 89

On vehicles with a panorama roof with power the side window has been reset correctly. If tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the this is not the case, repeat the steps above roller sunblinds. again. i The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle. X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: X Press and hold the & button again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof Opening and closing with power tilt/sliding panel close. X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button.

Resetting the side windows You must reset each side window if: Rthe side window opens again slightly after being closed fully. Rthe side window can no longer be fully opened or closed. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 87). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 87). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released,

Z 90 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Problems with the side windows G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot X Remove the objects. be closed because it is X Close the side window. blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.

Opening and closing A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding If somebody becomes trapped: panel Rrelease the switch immediately, or Important safety notes Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power The opening or closing procedure will be stop- tilt/sliding panel. ped. G WARNING G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, If children operate the sliding sunroof they body parts in close proximity could become could become trapped, particularly if they are trapped. There is a risk of injury. left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close When leaving the vehicle, always take the proximity during the opening and closing pro- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never cedures. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 91

G WARNING G WARNING At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto- The reversing feature does not react: matically lowers slightly at the rear. This could Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- trap you or other persons. There is a risk of gers injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the movement vehicle is in motion. Rduring resetting If somebody becomes trapped, immediately R pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid- when closing the sliding sunroof again man- ing sunroof lifts during opening. ually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of prevent someone being trapped in these sit- snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may uations. There is a risk of injury. occur. Make sure that no body parts are in close Do not allow anything to protrude from the proximity during the closing procedure. sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could If somebody becomes trapped: be damaged. Rrelease the switch immediately, or ! Opening and closing The weather can change abruptly. It could Rduring automatic operation, push the start to rain or snow. Make sure that the switch briefly in any direction sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the The closing process is stopped. vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. Operating the sliding sunroof i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing feature The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object Overhead control panel blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during : To raise the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens ; To open again automatically. The automatic reversing = To close/lower feature is only an aid and is no substitute for X your attention when closing the sliding roof. Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the roller sunblinds are open. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction.

Z 92 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

i If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond The opening or closing procedure will be stop- the point of resistance, automatic opera- ped. tion is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior pressing/pulling the switch again. from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can Automatic operation for raising is available only be opened and closed together when the only when the sliding sunroof is closed. sliding sunroof is closed. i You can continue to operate the sliding Roller sunblind reversing feature sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the SmartKey from the ignition The roller sunblinds are equipped with an lock. This function remains active for five automatic reversing feature. If a solid object minutes or until you open a front door. blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the automatic closing process, the roller sunblind Rain-closing feature opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and The raised sliding sunroof automatically low- does not relieve you of the responsibility of ers at the rear when driving if it starts to rain. paying attention when closing the roller sun-

Opening and closing The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on: blinds. R the road speed and G WARNING Rthe intensity of the rain. The reversing feature especially does not You can manually cancel the automatic clos- react to soft, light and thin objects such as ing procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch small fingers. This means that the reversing in any direction. feature cannot prevent someone being trap- To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the ped in these situations. There is a risk of 3 switch in direction :. The rain-closing injury. feature remains activated. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. Operating the roller sunblind for the If somebody becomes trapped: sliding sunroof Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the Important safety notes switch briefly in any direction G WARNING The closing process is stopped. When opening or closing the roller sunblind, parts of the body could be trapped between the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 93

Opening and closing X Make sure that the sliding sunroof (Y page 91) and the roller sunblinds (Y page 93) can be fully opened and closed again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

Overhead control panel : To open ; To open = To close X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. Opening and closing X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds If the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly, reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds: X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the roller sunblinds are fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second.

Z 94 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Problems with the sliding sunroof G WARNING If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption, then the backing up function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens not be closed and you again slightly: cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 Opening and closing switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then reopens slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. 95

Useful information ...... 96 Correct driver's seat position ...... 96 Seats ...... 97 Steering wheel ...... 102 Mirrors ...... 103 Memory functions ...... 106 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 96 Correct driver's seat position

Useful information X Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly. i This Operator's Manual describes all Manual seat adjustment (Y page 98) models and all standard and optional equip- Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 98) ment of your vehicle available at the time of When adjusting the seat, make sure that: publication of the Operator's Manual. R Country-specific differences are possible. you are as far away from the driver's air Please note that your vehicle may not be bag as possible. equipped with all features described. This Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi- also applies to safety-related systems and tion. functions. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. R i Read the information on qualified special- you have moved the backrest to an ist workshops (Y page 28). almost vertical position. Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Correct driver's seat position Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is adjus- G WARNING ted properly (Y page 98). You could lose control of your vehicle if you do When doing so, make sure that you have the following while driving: adjusted the head restraint so that the back Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, of your head is supported at eye level by the steering wheel or mirrors center of the head restraint. Rfasten the seat belt Observe the safety guidelines on steering There is a risk of an accident. wheel adjustment (Y page 102). Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt ted properly. before starting the engine. Adjusting the steering wheel (Y page 102) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 44). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 46).

Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 97). Seats 97

The seat belt should: Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- Rfit snugly across your body ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt Rbe routed across the middle of your before starting the engine. shoulder G WARNING Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir- thereby injured. Children in particular could ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 103) in accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- such a way that you have a good view of ment buttons and become trapped. There is a road and traffic conditions. risk of injury. X Vehicles with a memory function: save While moving the seats, make sure that your the seat and exterior mirror settings hands or other body parts do not get under the Y ( page 106). lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

Seats G WARNING Important safety notes When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the G WARNING seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Children could become trapped if they adjust Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one the seats, particularly when unattended. has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never (Y page 48) and "Children in the Vehicle" leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. (Y page 58).

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seats can still be adjusted when there is heating, observe the following information: no SmartKey in the ignition lock. Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If G WARNING liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could soon as possible. move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not motion. This could cause you to lose control of switch on the seat heating. The seat the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. heating should also not be used to dry Always make sure that the driver's seat is the seats. engaged before starting the engine. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. G WARNING Rdo not transport heavy loads on the You could lose control of your vehicle if you do seats. Do not place sharp objects on the the following while driving: seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, The seats should only be occupied by steering wheel or mirrors passengers, if possible. Rfasten the seat belt Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do There is a risk of an accident. not cover the seats with insulating mate-

Z 98 Seats

rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov- Seat cushion angle ers, child seats or booster seats. Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly ! Make sure that there are no objects in the supported. footwell under or behind the seats when X Turn handwheel ; forwards or backwards. moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. Adjusting the seats electrically i Further related subjects: Rcargo compartment enlargement (folding down the rear seats) (Y page 270)

Adjusting the seats manually

: Head restraint height1 ; Seat cushion angle = Seat height ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment A Backrest angle i You can store the seat settings using the Seat fore-and-aft adjustment memory function (Y page 106). Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or backwards. Adjusting the head restraints X Release lever : again. G Make sure that you hear the seat engage in WARNING position. You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Backrest angle Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors X Relieve the pressure on the backrest. Rfasten the seat belt X Turn handwheel ? forwards or backwards. There is a risk of an accident. Seat height Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt X Pull handle = upwards or push it down before starting the engine. repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. G WARNING If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection

1 Not available on vehicles with sports seats. Seats 99

as intended. There is an increased risk of Adjusting the fore/aft position of the injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the head restraint event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head.

General notes With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of For vehicles with sports seats you cannot the seat occupant's head. adjust the front head restraints or the outer rear head restraints. X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until Adjusting the head restraints manually it engages. There are several notches. Adjusting the head restraint height X To move backwards: press and hold release button : and push the head restraint backwards. X When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that the head restraint is engaged in posi-

tion. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Adjusting the height of the head restraints electrically X To adjust the head restraint height: slide X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the the switch for head restraint adjustment desired position. (Y page 98) up or down in the direction of X To lower: press release catch : in the the arrow. direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position.

Z 100 Seats

Rear seat head restraints AMG Performance Seat Adjusting the rear seat head restraint To adjust the contour of the seat and for height improved lateral support, you can individually adjust the front seats2.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat X To lower: press release catch : and push cushion the head restraint down until it is in the X To set the side bolsters of the seat desired position. cushion narrower: press button :. X To set the side bolsters of the seat Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support cushion wider: press button ;. You can adjust the contour of the front seat Adjusting the seat backrest side bol- backrests individually to provide optimum sters support for your back. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest narrower: press button =. X To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest wider: press button ?.

Switching the seat heating on/off Activating/deactivating

G WARNING : To raise the backrest contour Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can ; To soften the backrest contour cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to = To lower the backrest contour become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ? To harden the backrest contour ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.

2 Only in conjunction with electrically adjustable seats. Seats 101

Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 143). Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.

Z 102 Steering wheel

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con- switched off prema- sumers are switched on. turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically.

Steering wheel Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering Important safety notes wheel while the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. :

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Release lever G WARNING ; To adjust the steering wheel height Children could injure themselves if they = To adjust the steering wheel position adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of (fore-and-aft adjustment) injury. X Push release lever : down completely. When leaving the vehicle, always take the The steering column is unlocked. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. Adjusting the steering wheel The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. G WARNING When doing so, try to push the steering If the steering wheel is unlocked while the wheel up or down or try to move it in the vehicle is in motion, it could change position fore-and-aft direction. unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Mirrors 103

Mirrors Rear-view mirror

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). X Press button : for the left-hand exterior X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte- forwards or back. rior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. Exterior mirrors The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected Adjusting the exterior mirrors mirror using adjustment button = as long G WARNING as the indicator lamp is lit. X = You could lose control of your vehicle if you do Press adjustment button up, down, or to the following while driving: the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, should have a good overview of traffic con- steering wheel or mirrors ditions. R Seats, steering wheel and mirrors fasten the seat belt The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger There is a risk of an accident. field of vision. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- After the engine has been started, the exte- ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt rior mirrors are automatically heated at low before starting the engine. outside temperatures. Heating takes a maximum of ten minutes. G WARNING i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors The exterior mirror on the front-passenger manually by switching on the rear window side reduces the size of the image. Visible defroster. objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the dis- Folding the exterior mirrors in or out tance from road users traveling behind, e.g. electrically when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident. This function is only available in Canada. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Z 104 Mirrors

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door. i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the Exterior mirror pushed out of position ignition lock (Y page 143). If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of X Briefly press button :. position, proceed as follows: Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X Vehicles without electrically folding i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror always folded out fully while driving. They into the correct position manually. could otherwise vibrate. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding i If you are driving faster than 30 mph button (Y page 103) until you hear a click (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the and then the mirrors engage in position. exterior mirrors. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual Setting the exterior mirrors (Y page 103). This function is only available in Canada. If the battery has been disconnected or com-

Seats, steering wheel andpletely mirrors discharged, the exterior mirrors must Automatic anti-glare mirrors be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise G WARNING not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- computer (Y page 218). matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- come into contact with your skin, eyes, res- Y tion lock ( page 143). piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. X Briefly press button :. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the electrolyte, Folding the exterior mirrors in or out observe the following: automatically RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin This function is only available in Canada. immediately with water. If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of is activated in the on-board computer your eyes thoroughly with clean water. (Y page 218): RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Mirrors 105

RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is only available if the vehicle is equipped with the "Mirrors package". X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror X on the driver's side automatically go into anti- Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Y glare mode if: tion lock ( page 143). X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on Rthe ignition is switched on and the front-passenger side. Rincident light from headlamps strikes the X Engage reverse gear. sensor in the rear-view mirror The exterior mirror on the front-passenger The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if side moves to the preset parking position. reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting X Use adjustment button = to adjust the is switched on. exterior mirror. You should see the rear wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror. Parking position for the exterior mir- The parking position is stored. ror on the front-passenger side i If you shift the transmission to another General notes position, the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side returns to the driving posi- The "Parking position of the exterior mirror on tion. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors the front-passenger side" function is only Using the memory button available if the vehicle is equipped with the "Mirrors package". You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see Setting and storing the parking position the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be Using reverse gear stored using memory button M ?. You can position the front-passenger side X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. exterior mirror in such a way that you can see X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- the rear wheel on that side as soon as you tion lock (Y page 143). engage reverse gear. You can store this posi- X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on tion. the front-passenger side. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. You should see the rear wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.

Z 106 Memory functions

X Press memory button M ? and one of the While the memory function is making adjust- arrows on adjustment button = within ments, make sure that no one has any body three seconds. parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody The parking position is stored if the exterior becomes trapped, immediately release the mirror does not move. memory function position button. The adjust- X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat ment process is stopped. the steps. G WARNING Calling up a stored parking position set- Children could become trapped if they acti- ting vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- When leaving the vehicle, always take the tion lock (Y page 143). SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. passenger side with the corresponding button (Y page 103). The memory function can be used at any time, X Engage reverse gear. e.g. even when the key isn't in the ignition The exterior mirror on the front-passenger lock. side moves to the stored parking position. With the memory function, you can store up The exterior mirror on the front-passenger to three different settings, e.g. for three dif- side moves back to its original position: ferent people. The following settings are stored as a single Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph memory preset: (15 km/h) Rposition of the seat, backrest and head Rabout ten seconds after you have disen- restraint gaged reverse gear Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir- Rif you press button : for the exterior mir- Seats, steering wheel and mirrors rors on the driver's and front-passenger ror on the driver's side sides

Memory functions Storing settings G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Memory functions 107

X Adjust the seat (Y page 98). X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's side (Y page 103). X Briefly press the M memory button and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant preset position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior d mirrors mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position

button. wheel an Seats, steering

Z 108 109

Useful information ...... 110 Exterior lighting ...... 110 Interior lighting ...... 115 Replacing bulbs ...... 117 Windshield wipers ...... 121 Lights and windshield wipers 110 Exterior lighting

Useful information Setting the exterior lighting Setting options i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equip- Exterior lighting can be set using: ment of your vehicle available at the time of Rthe light switch publication of the Operator's Manual. R Y Country-specific differences are possible. the combination switch ( page 112) Please note that your vehicle may not be Rthe on-board computer (Y page 216) equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and Light switch functions. Operation i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28).

Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obli- 1 W Left-hand standing lamps gations. 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and Driving abroad instrument cluster lighting Lights and windshield wipers 4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- Conversion to symmetrical low beam led by the light sensor Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps beam in countries in which traffic drives on B R Rear fog lamp the opposite side of the road from the country C N Fog lamp (only vehicles with front where the vehicle is registered. This prevents fog lamps) glare to oncoming traffic. When using sym- If you hear a warning tone when you leave the metrical lights, the edge of the road is not lit vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. as widely and as far ahead as normal. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Have the headlamps converted at a qualified specialist workshop as close to the border as The exterior lighting (except the parking/ possible before driving in these countries. standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Conversion to asymmetrical low beam Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock after returning Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in Have the headlamps converted back to asym- position 0 metrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible after crossing the border again. Exterior lighting 111

Automatic headlamp mode turn on the daytime running lamps and park- G WARNING ing lamps. When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- If the engine is running and you turn the light beam headlamps may not be switched on switch to L, the manual settings take automatically if there is fog, snow or other precedence over the daytime running lamps. causes of poor visibility due to the weather USA only: conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an The daytime running lamps improve the visi- accident. bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, In such situations, turn the light switch to the daytime running lamps function must be L. switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 216). The automatic headlamp feature is only an If the engine is running and you turn the light aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's switch to T or L, the manual settings lighting at all times. take precedence over the daytime running Ã is the favored light switch setting. The lamps. light setting is automatically selected accord- Low-beam headlamps ing to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather con- Even if the light sensor does not detect that it ditions such as fog, snow or spray): is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: headlamps switch on when the ignition is the parking lamps are switched on or off switched on and the light switch is set to the L automatically depending on the brightness position. This is a particularly useful of the ambient light. function in the event of rain and fog. X RWith the engine running: if you have acti- To switch on the low-beam headlamps: vated the "daytime running lamps" function turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to via the on-board computer, the daytime position 2 or start the engine. X running lamps or the parking lamps and the Turn the light switch to L. Lights and windshield wipers low-beam headlamps are switched on or off The green L indicator lamp in the instru- automatically depending on the brightness ment cluster lights up. of the ambient light. Front fog lamps X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. In conditions where visibility is poor due to fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve vis- Canada only: ibility as well as making it easier for other road The daytime running lamps improve the visi- users to see you. They can be operated bility of your vehicle during the day. The day- together with the parking lamps or together time running lamps function is required by law with the parking lamps and low-beam head- in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. lamps. When the engine is running and the vehicle is X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn stationary: if you move the selector lever from the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position a drive position to P, the daytime running 2 or start the engine. lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in high ambient light brightness: if you turn the light switch to T, you

Z 112 Exterior lighting

X Press the N button. Standing lamps The green N indicator lamp in the instru- Switching on the standing lamps ensures the ment cluster lights up. corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina- X To switch off the front fog lamps: press ted. the N button. X To switch on the standing lamps: the The green N indicator lamp in the instru- SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in ment cluster goes out. position 0. Only vehicles with front fog lamps are equip- X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side ped with the "fog lamp" function; information of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of on the fog lamp function for vehicles with the vehicle). Intelligent Light System (Y page 114). Rear fog lamp Combination switch The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of Turn signal thick fog. Please take note of the country- specific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps. X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the : High-beam headlamps Lights and windshield wipers R button. ; The yellow R indicator lamp in the Turn signal, right instrument cluster goes out. = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left Parking lamps X To indicate briefly: press the combination ! If the battery has been excessively dis- switch briefly to the pressure point in the charged, the parking lamps or standing direction of arrow ; or ?. lamps are automatically switched off to The corresponding turn signal flashes three enable the next engine start. Always park times. your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit X To indicate: press the combination switch according to legal standards. Avoid the beyond the pressure point in the direction continuous use of the T parking lamps of arrow ; or ?. for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left standing lamp. High-beam headlamps X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instru- X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: ment cluster lights up. turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. Exterior lighting 113

X Press the combination switch beyond the X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: pressure point in the direction of arrow :. press button :. In the Ã position, the high-beam head- All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a lamps are only switched on when it is dark turn signal using the combination switch, and the engine is running. only the turn signal lamp on the corre- The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- sponding side of the vehicle will flash. ment cluster lights up when the high-beam X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: headlamps are switched on. press button :. X To switch off the high-beam head- The hazard warning lamps switch off auto- lamps: move the combination switch back matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of to its normal position. above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- brake application. ment cluster goes out. i i The hazard warning lamps still operate if Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: the ignition is switched off. when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation of the high-beam headlamps (Y page 114). Cornering light function High-beam flasher X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =.

Hazard warning lamps Lights and windshield wipers

The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The cornering light function can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel The hazard warning lamps automatically Rif you are driving at speeds between switch on if: 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) Ran air bag is deployed or and turn the steering wheel Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and time, but is automatically switched off after comes to a standstill no more than three minutes.

Z 114 Exterior lighting

Extended range fog lamps

The extended range fog lamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the road. Active: if you are driving at speeds below 40 mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rear fog lamp. Not active: if, following activation, you are Important safety notes driving at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h) or if you switch off the rear fog lamp. G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users: Adaptive Highbeam Assist Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians General notes Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Lights and windshield wipers You can use this function to set the head- whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier lamps to change between low beam and high In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist beam automatically. The system recognizes may fail to recognize other road users that vehicles with their lights on, either approach- have lights, or may recognize them too late. In ing from the opposite direction or traveling in this or similar situations, the automatic high- front of your vehicle, and consequently beam headlamps will not be deactivated or switches the headlamps from high beam to activated regardless. There is a risk of an acci- low beam. dent. The system automatically adapts the low- Always carefully observe the traffic conditions beam headlamp range depending on the dis- and switch off the high-beam headlamps in tance to the other vehicle. Once the system good time. no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac- tivates the high-beam headlamps. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into The system's optical sensor is located behind account road, weather or traffic conditions. the windshield near the overhead control Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You panel. are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. Interior lighting 115

In particular, the detection of obstacles can Headlamps fogged up on the inside be restricted if there is: Certain climatic and physical conditions may R poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This snow moisture does not affect the functionality of Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are the headlamp. obscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Interior lighting on/off Overview of interior lighting X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 28 mph (45 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. Front overhead control panel If you are driving at speeds above approx- : p To switch the left-hand front reading imately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no other lamp on/off road users have been detected: ; c To switch the front interior lighting The high-beam headlamps are switched on on = v To switch the on/off automatically. The K indicator lamp in Lights and windshield wipers the instrument cluster also lights up. ? | To switch the front interior lighting/ If you are driving at speeds below approx- automatic interior lighting control off imately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other road A p To switch the right-hand front read- users have been detected or the roads are ing lamp on/off adequately lit: B To switch the automatic interior lighting The high-beam headlamps are switched off control on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes out.

Z 116 Interior lighting

Automatic interior lighting control X To switch on: set the switch to center position B. X To switch off: set the switch to the | position. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rear-compartment overhead control panel (vehi- Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock cles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel) The interior light is activated for a short while : p To switch the reading lamp on/off when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 217).

Manual interior lighting control X To switch the front interior lighting on: set the switch to the c position. X To switch the interior lighting off: set the switch to the | position or (if the door is closed) to the center position. X Rear-compartment overhead control panel (vehi- To switch the interior lighting on/off: cles without a panorama roof with power tilt/slid- press the u button.

Lights and windshield wipers ing panel) X To switch the reading lamps on/off: : p To switch the left-hand reading lamp press the p button. on/off ; p To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically Interior lighting control if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive Important notes emergency lighting: press the hazard In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from warning lamp button. discharging, the interior lighting functions are or automatically deactivated after some time X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the key. ignition lock. The brightness of the ambient lighting may be set using the on-board computer (Y page 216). Replacing bulbs 117

Replacing bulbs bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Important safety notes Marks on the glass tube reduce the service Xenon bulbs life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the G DANGER glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get rub it off with a lint-free cloth. an electric shock if you remove the cover of Protect bulbs from moisture during opera- the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con- tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. with liquids. Never touch the parts or the electrical con- There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on that you cannot replace. Replace only the the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe- bulbs listed (Y page 117). Have the bulbs that cialist workshop. you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop. If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, If you require assistance changing bulbs, con- you can recognize this by the following: the sult a qualified specialist workshop. cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again If the new bulb still does not light up, consult when you start the engine. For this to be a qualified specialist workshop. observed, the lights must be switched on Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of before starting the engine. vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of that these function correctly at all times. vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

Other bulbs You can change the following bulbs. The bulb Lights and windshield wipers type can be found in the legend. G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou touch it Vehicles with halogen headlamps : Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W Rit is hot ; High-beam headlamps/daytime running Ryou drop it lights: H15 55 W/15 W Ryou scratch it = Low-beam headlamps/parking lamps/ Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps standing lamps: H7 55 W designed for that purpose. Only install spare

Z 118 Replacing bulbs

Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps X To remove: switch off the lights. : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W X Turn the front wheels inwards. X Slide cover : up and remove it. X To install: insert cover : again and slide it down until it engages.

Low-beam headlamps/parking and standing lamps (halogen headlamps)

Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) : Backup lamp: W 16 W ; Rear fog lamp: H 21 W

Lights and windshield wipers = Brake lamp: W 16 W ? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W

Changing the front bulbs X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 118). Removing and installing the cover in the X : front wheel housing Turn housing cover counter-clockwise and pull it out. You must remove the cover from the front X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and wheel housing before you can change the pull it out. front bulbs. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 118). Replacing bulbs 119

High-beam headlamps/daytime run- Cornering light function (Bi-Xenon ning lamps (halogen headlamps) headlamps)

X Switch off the lights. X Switch off the lights. X Open the hood. X Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. and pull it out. X Turn bulb ; counter-clockwise and pull it X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and out. pull it out. X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. stop. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Align housing cover : and turn it clock- X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn wise until it engages. it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clock- Turn signals (halogen headlamps) wise until it engages. Lights and windshield wipers

Changing the rear bulbs Opening and closing the side trim panels You must open the side trim panel in the cargo compartment before you can change the bulbs in the tail lamps.

X Switch off the lights. X Open the hood. X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise until it engages.

Z 120 Replacing bulbs

X Release and remove connector ;. X Unscrew wing nut : and remove the lamp cluster.

Left-hand side trim panel X To open: turn release knob : counter- clockwise and remove side trim panel ;. X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn Lamp unit release knob : clockwise. X Loosen screws = using a screwdriver. X Remove the bulb holder from the lamp cluster.

Lights and windshield wipers Right-hand side trim panel X To open: release right-hand trim panel : at the top and fold it down in the direction Bulb holder of the arrow. ? Turn signal X To close: insert side panel :. A Brake lamp X Turn signal lamp: lightly press the bulb Tail lamps into the bulb holder, turn it counter-clockwise and remove it from bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Brake light: remove the corresponding bulb from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Insert the bulb holder into the lamp unit and fasten in place with screws =. X Insert the lamp unit into the vehicle. Windshield wipers 121

X Tighten wing nut ; and re-establish contact with connector :. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 119). Backup lamp and rear fog lamp Due to their location, have the bulbs in the backup lamp (vehicles with halogen headlamps) and rear fog lamp in the tailgate changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Windshield wipers Combination switch 1 $ Windshield wiper off Switching the windshield wipers 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor on/off set to low sensitivity) ! Do not operate the windshield wipers 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor when the windshield is dry, as this could set to high sensitivity) damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow that has collected on the windshield can 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast scratch the glass if wiping takes place when B í Single wipe/î To wipe the wind- the windshield is dry. shield using washer fluid If it is necessary to switch on the windshield X Switch on the ignition. wipers in dry weather conditions, always X use washer fluid when operating the wind- Turn the combination switch to the corre- shield wipers. sponding position. ! ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the windshield becomes dirty in dry weather condi-

the windshield after the vehicle has been Lights and windshield wipers washed in an automatic car wash, wax or tions, the windshield wipers may be activa- other residues may be the reason for this. ted inadvertently. This could then damage Clean the windshield using washer fluid the windshield wiper blades or scratch the after washing the vehicle in an automatic windshield. car wash. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wipers to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions.

Z 122 Windshield wipers

Switching the rear window wiper on/ Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a off wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear window. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield/rear window, the windshield/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Combination switch Changing the windshield wiper blades : è Switch Removing the wiper blades 2 ô To wipe with washer fluid X 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- 5 ô To wipe with washer fluid shield. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). X Turn switch : on the combination switch to the corresponding position. When the rear window wiper is switched on, a symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the instrument cluster. Lights and windshield wipers

Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes X Press both release clips ;. G WARNING X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of If the windshield wipers begin to move while arrow = away from wiper arm ?. you are changing the wiper blades, you could X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of arrow A. injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. ! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield/rear window. Windshield wipers 123

Installing the wiper blades Installing a wiper blade

X Position new wiper blade : with recess B X Position new wiper blade : with recess B on lug A. on lug A. X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining clips ; engage in bracket ?. clips ; engage in bracket ?. X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated correctly. correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind- X Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win- shield. dow.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade Lights and windshield wipers

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Fold wiper arm ? away from the rear window. X Press both release clips ;. X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = away from wiper arm ?. X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of arrow A.

Z 124 Windshield wipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work- nozzles no longer hits shop. the center of the windshield. Lights and windshield wipers 125

Useful information ...... 126 Overview of climate control systems ...... 126 Operating the climate control systems ...... 131 Setting the air vents ...... 138 Climate control 126 Overview of climate control systems

Useful information clear (Y page 119). Otherwise the vehicle will not be ventilated correctly. i This Operator's Manual describes all i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period models and all standard and optional equip- during warm weather, e.g. using the con- ment of your vehicle available at the time of venience opening feature (Y page 88). This publication of the Operator's Manual. will speed up the cooling process and the Country-specific differences are possible. desired interior temperature will be Please note that your vehicle may not be reached more quickly. equipped with all features described. This i also applies to safety-related systems and The integrated filter filters out most par- functions. ticles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol- i Read the information on qualified special- lutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces ist workshops (Y page 28). the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, Overview of climate control systems which is specified in the Maintenance General notes Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the Observe the settings recommended on the interval may be shorter than stated in the following pages. The windows could other- Maintenance Booklet. wise fog up. i It is possible that the residual heat func- To prevent the windows from fogging up:

Climate control tion may be activated automatically an hour Rswitch off climate control only briefly after the SmartKey has been removed in Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only order to dry the air-conditioning system. briefly The vehicle is then ventilated for Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi- 30 minutes. cation function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required The air-conditioning system/dual-zone automatic climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters out undesirable substances from the air. The air-conditioning system/dual-zone automatic climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 137). Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the side trim panel in the cargo compartment Overview of climate control systems 127

Air-conditioning system control panel rol

USA only : To set the temperature (Y page 133) ; To defrost the windshield (Y page 135) = To set the air distribution (Y page 134) ? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 137) A To set the airflow (Y page 134) Climate cont B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 131) C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 136)

Canada only : To set the temperature (Y page 133) ; To defrost the windshield (Y page 135) = To set the air distribution (Y page 134) 128 Overview of climate control systems

? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 137) A To set the airflow (Y page 134) B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 131) C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 136)

Notes on using the air-conditioning ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. system if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- Air-conditioning system erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn Below, you can find a number of notes and into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. recommendations to help you use the air- RVehicles with COMAND: if you change the conditioning system optimally. settings of the climate control system, the RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by climate status display appears for three turning control knob A clockwise to the seconds at the bottom of the screen in the desired position (except position 0). COMAND display. See also the separate COMAND operating instructions. You will RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). see the current settings of the various cli- R Recommendation for avoiding misted mate control functions. windows at low exterior temperatures or in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with ECO start/stop function dehumidification function (Y page 131). During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-

Climate control Set air distribution to ¯ and if possible switch off P and O (Y page 134). mate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full cli- In air-recirculation mode, switch e off mate control output, you can switch off the (Y page 137). ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO Set airflow control A to a setting between button (Y page 146). 3 and 6 (Y page 134). RRecommendation for rapid cooling or heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set airflow control A to a setting between 3 and 6 (Y page 134). RRecommendation for a constant vehicle interior temperature: set airflow control A to a setting between 1 and 3 (Y page 134). RRecommendation for air distribution in the winter: set O and ¯ (Y page 134). Recommendation for air distribution in the summer: set P or P and ¯ (Y page 134). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. Overview of climate control systems 129

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

USA only : To set the temperature, left (Y page 133) ; To set climate control to automatic (Y page 133) = To defrost the windshield (Y page 135) ? To increase the airflow (Y page 134) A To set the air distribution (Y page 134) Climate control B Display C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 137) D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 131) E To set the temperature, right (Y page 133) F To activate/deactivate maximum cooling (Y page 135) G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 131) H To reduce the airflow (Y page 134) I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 136) J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 134) 130 Overview of climate control systems

Canada only : To set the temperature, left (Y page 133) ; To set climate control to automatic (Y page 133) = To defrost the windshield (Y page 135) ? To increase the airflow (Y page 134) A To set the air distribution (Y page 134)

Climate control B Display C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 137) D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 131) E To set the temperature, right (Y page 133) F To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 137) G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 131) H To reduce the airflow (Y page 134) I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 136) J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 134)

Optimum use of dual-zone automatic ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func- climate control tion briefly until the windshield is clear again. Automatic climate control ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. The following contains instructions and rec- if there are unpleasant outside odors or ommendations to enable you to get the most when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- out of your dual-zone automatic climate con- erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn trol. into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RActivate climate control using the Ã and RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem- ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the perature settings on the driver's side for Ã and ¿ buttons light up. the front-passenger side as well. The indi- RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). cator lamp in the á button goes out. Operating the climate control systems 131

ROnly available on vehicles for Canada: Dual-zone automatic climate control use the residual heat function if you want to X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when tion lock (Y page 143). the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deac- X To activate: press the Ã button. tivated with the ignition switched off. The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights RVehicles with COMAND: if you change the up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for three or seconds at the bottom of the screen in the X Press the ^ button. COMAND display. See also the separate The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes COMAND operating instructions. You will out. The previously selected settings are see the current settings of the various cli- restored. mate control functions. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights ECO start/stop function up. During automatic engine switch-off, the cli- i Dual-zone automatic climate control: mate control system only operates at a switch on climate control primarily using reduced capacity. If you require the full cli- the Ã button. mate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 146). Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification Climate control Operating the climate control sys- General notes tems If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- Switching climate control on/off midification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- General notes cle will also not be dehumidified. The win- When the climate control is switched off, the dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only air supply and air circulation are also deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi- switched off. The windows could fog up. cation" function briefly. Therefore, switch off climate control only The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func- briefly tion is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and Air-conditioning system dehumidified according to the temperature selected. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Condensation may drip from the underside of Y tion lock ( page 143). the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc- the desired position (except position 0) tion. (Y page 127). X To switch off: turn control A counter- clockwise to position 0 (Y page 127). 132 Operating the climate control systems

Activating/deactivating X To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature. rol Climate cont Operating the climate control systems 133

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a the ¿ button malfunction. flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. remains off. The "Cool- ing with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on.

Setting climate control to automatic X To switch to manual mode: press the É or Ë button. General notes or The automatic function is only available in X Press the K or I button. conjunction with dual-zone automatic climate The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes control. out. Automatic air distribution and airflow In automatic mode, the set temperature is are deactivated. maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and Setting the temperature the air distribution. Climate control Air-conditioning system The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" You can set the temperature for the entire function is activated. If necessary, cooling vehicle. The set temperature is automatically with air dehumidification can be deactivated. maintained at a constant level. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- midification" function, the air inside the vehi- tion lock (Y page 143). cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- X To increase/reduce: turn control : cle will also not be dehumidified. The win- clockwise or counter-clockwise dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only (Y page 127). Only change the temperature deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi- setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ cation" function briefly. (22 †). Setting climate control to automatic Dual-zone automatic climate control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. The set X Set the desired temperature. temperature is automatically maintained at a X To activate: press the Ã button. constant level. The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights X 2 up. Automatic air distribution and airflow Turn the SmartKey to position in the igni- Y are activated. tion lock ( page 143). X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheel : or E to the left or right (Y page 129). Only 134 Operating the climate control systems

change the temperature setting in small Setting the air distribution increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly Setting the air distribution until the desired symbol appears in the dis- Air-conditioning system play.

Air distribution settings ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents Setting the airflow P Directs air through the center and side Air-conditioning system air vents X 2 O Directs air through the footwell air Turn the SmartKey to position in the igni- Y vents tion lock ( page 143). X To increase/reduce: turn control A i You can also activate several air distribu- clockwise or counter-clockwise tion settings simultaneously. To do this, (Y page 127). press multiple air distribution buttons. The air is then directed through various vents. Dual-zone automatic climate control Setting the air distribution X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). Y tion lock ( page 143). X To increase/reduce: press the K or Climate control X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯ I button. buttons. The corresponding indicator lamp lights up briefly. Switching the ZONE function on/off

Dual-zone automatic climate control This function is only available with dual-zone automatic climate control. Air distribution settings X To activate: press the á button. ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents The indicator lamp in the á button lights P Directs air through the center and side up. air vents The temperature setting for the driver's O Directs air through the footwell air side is not adopted for the front-passenger vents side. b Directs the airflow through the center X To deactivate: press the á button. and side air vents as well as the The indicator lamp in the á button goes defroster vents out. a Directs air through the defroster and The temperature setting for the driver's footwell vents side is adopted for the front-passenger side. i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise until they engage. Operating the climate control systems 135

Defrosting the windshield or X Air-conditioning system: turn temperature You can use this function to defrost the wind- control : clockwise or counter-clockwise shield or to defrost the inside of the wind- (Y page 127). shield and the side windows. Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn i You should only select the "Windshield temperature control : or E clockwise or defrosting" function until the windshield is counter-clockwise (Y page 129). clear again. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). MAX COOL maximum cooling X To activate: press the ¬ button. The MAX COOL function is only available in The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights vehicles for the USA. up. MAX COOL is only operational when the The climate control system switches to the engine is running. following functions: X To activate: press the Ù button. Rhigh airflow The indicator lamp in the button lights up. rol Rhigh temperature X To deactivate: press the Ù button Rair distribution to the windshield and again. front side windows The indicator lamp goes out. The previously Rair-recirculation mode off selected settings are restored. i The "Windshield defrosting" function When you activate MAX COOL, climate con- automatically sets the blower output to the trol switches to the following functions: Climate cont optimum defrosting effect. As a result, the Rmaximum cooling airflow may increase or decrease automat- Rmaximum airflow ically after the button is pressed. Rair-recirculation mode on i You can adjust the blower output manually while the "Windshield defrosting" function is in operation: Defrosting the windows RAir-conditioning system: turn airflow control A clockwise or counter-clock- Windows fogged up on the inside Y wise ( page 127). Air-conditioning system RDual-zone automatic climate control: X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehu- press the ó or ô button. midification" function. X To deactivate: ¬ press the button. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function. out. The previously selected settings are i You should only select this setting until restored. Air-recirculation mode remains the windshield is clear again. deactivated. or X Dual-zone automatic climate control: press the Ã button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. 136 Operating the climate control systems

Dual-zone automatic climate control X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outside X Activate the windshield wipers. X Set the air distribution to P or O. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. rol

Rear window defroster General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as Climate cont soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. Operating the climate control systems 137

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged. defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading ted prematurely or can- lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula- i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto- tion mode matically: R General notes after approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if 41 ‡ (5 †) unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle Rafter approximately five minutes if the from outside. The air already inside the vehi- "Cooling with air dehumidification" func- cle will then be recirculated. tion is deactivated If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out- windows can fog up more quickly, in particu- side temperatures above approximately lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu- 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehu- lation mode briefly to prevent the windows midification" function is activated Climate control from fogging up. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels. Activating/deactivating the residual heat function Activating/deactivating General notes X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). The residual heat function is only available in vehicles for Canada with dual-zone automatic X To activate: e press the button. climate control. The indicator lamp in the e button lights It is possible to make use of the residual heat up. of the engine to continue heating the vehicle i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto- for approximately 30 minutes after the engine matically at high outside temperatures. has been switched off. The heating time When air-recirculation mode is activated depends on the set interior temperature. automatically, the indicator lamp in the i The blower will run at a low speed regard- e button is not lit. Outside air is added less of the airflow setting. after about 30 minutes. i If you activate the residual heat function X To deactivate: press the e button. at high temperatures, only the ventilation The indicator lamp in the e button goes will be activated. The blower runs at out. medium speed. 138 Setting the air vents

i You cannot use the ventilation to cool the i For optimal climate control in the vehicle, vehicle interior to a temperature lower than open the air vents completely and set the the outside temperature. adjusters to the central position.

Activating/deactivating Setting the center air vents X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 143). X To activate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up. X To deactivate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out. i Residual heat is deactivated automatically: R after approximately 30 minutes X To open the center air vent: turn the Rwhen the ignition is switched on adjuster in one of center air vents : coun- Rif the battery voltage drops ter-clockwise to position 2. X To close the center air vent: turn the adjuster in one of center air vents : clock-

Climate control Setting the air vents wise as far as it will go to position 3. Important safety notes G WARNING Setting the side air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air out- lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: : Side window defroster vent Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield ; Side air vent and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, 3 Side air vent open snow or leaves. 4 Side air vent closed Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior. i You can move the adjusters for the air vents vertically or horizontally to set the direction of the airflow. Setting the air vents 139

X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; counter-clockwise to position 3. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will go to position 4.

Setting the rear-compartment air vents

: Rear-compartment air vent, left

; Rear-compartment air vent, right Climate control = Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or down. i If the control panel in the front is switched off, no air can flow through the rear air vents.

Z 140 141

Useful information ...... 142 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ...... 142 Driving ...... 142 Automatic transmission ...... 148 Refueling ...... 157 Parking ...... 159 Driving tips ...... 162 Driving systems ...... 172 Driving and parking 142 Driving

Useful information RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. i This Operator's Manual describes all RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator models and all standard and optional equip- pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick- ment of your vehicle available at the time of down). publication of the Operator's Manual. RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km), Country-specific differences are possible. drive in program E. Please note that your vehicle may not be After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can equipped with all features described. This increase the engine speed gradually and bring also applies to safety-related systems and the vehicle to full speed. functions. Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehi- i Read the information on qualified special- cles: Y ist workshops ( page 28). RDo not drive faster than 85 mph

Driving and parking (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum Important safety notes engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. R The sensor system of some driving and driv- Change gear in good time. ing safety systems adjusts automatically i You should also observe these notes on while a certain distance is being driven after breaking-in if the engine or parts of the the vehicle has been delivered or after drive train on your vehicle have been repairs. Full system effectiveness is not replaced. reached until the end of this teach-in proce- i dure. Always observe the respective speed limits. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compen- Driving sate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Important safety notes G WARNING The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The more you look after the engine when it is The operating and road safety of the vehicle is new, the more satisfied you will be with its jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. performance in the future. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are R You should therefore drive at varying vehi- stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter cle and engine speeds for the first the driver's footwell. Install the floormats 1000 miles (1500 km). securely and as specified in order to ensure RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt- sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use tle, during this period. loose floormats and do not place floormats on RChange gear in good time, before the tach- top of one another. ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. Driving 143

G WARNING SmartKey positions Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, g To remove the SmartKey safety-relevant functions are only available (shift the transmission to position P) with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, 1 Power supply for some consumers, such Driving and parking for example, the power steering and the brake as the windshield wipers boosting effect. You will require considerably 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk and drive position of an accident. 3 To start the engine Do not switch off the ignition while driving. i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni- G WARNING tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart- Key for the vehicle. The ignition is not If the parking brake has not been fully switched on. The engine cannot be started. released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. Starting the engine There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release Important safety notes the parking brake fully before driving off. G WARNING ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust the engine's full performance until it has gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling reached operating temperature. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There Only shift the automatic transmission to is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the desired drive position when the vehicle the engine running in enclosed spaces with- is stationary. out sufficient ventilation. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery G WARNING roads. You could otherwise damage the Flammable materials introduced through drive train. environmental influence or by animals can ! AMG vehicles: avoid full-load operation ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or and engine speeds greater than 5000 rpm parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk when the engine is cold. This helps to proof fire. tect the engine and avoids uncomfortable Carry out regular checks to make sure that driving. there are no flammable foreign materials in

Z 144 Driving

the engine compartment or in the exhaust X Release the brake pedal. system. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The electric parking brake is automatically ! Do not depress the accelerator when released (Y page 160). starting the engine. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada i During a cold start, the engine runs at only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- higher speeds to enable the catalytic con- ter goes out. verter to reach its operating temperature. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have The sound of the engine may change during pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors this time. drop down. Automatic transmission You can open the doors from the inside at any time. X Shift the transmission to position P. You can also deactivate the automatic lock-

Driving and parking Transmission position display P is shown in ing feature (Y page 217). the multifunction display. i Upshifts take place at higher engine i When the transmission is in position N, speeds after a cold start. This helps the you can also start the engine with the brake catalytic converter to reach its operating pedal depressed. temperature more quickly.

Starting procedure Hill start assist X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni- Hill start assist helps you when pulling away tion lock (Y page 143) and release it as forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It soon as the engine is running. holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot Pulling away from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to Automatic transmission roll. i It is only possible to shift the transmission G WARNING from position P to the desired position if After a short time, hill start assist will no lon- you depress the brake pedal. Only then can ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away. the parking lock be deactivated. If you do There is a risk of an accident and injury. not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT Therefore, quickly move your foot from the SELECT lever can still be moved but the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never parking lock remains engaged. leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start i At transmission fluid temperatures below assist. Ò4 ‡(Ò20 †), you can only shift out of park X position P into another transmission posi- Remove your foot from the brake pedal. tion when the engine is running. The vehicle is then held for about a second. X Pull away. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. Driving 145

Hill start assist is not active if: ¤ symbol is shown in the multifunction Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a display. downhill gradient. The stop/start function is automatically acti- Rthe transmission is in position N. vated each time you start the engine with the SmartKey. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function R ® ESP is malfunctioning. is only available in drive program C. Further information on holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients (Y page 151). Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, ECO start/stop function the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. Introduction The ECO start/stop function is operational

The ECO start/stop function switches the when: Driving and parking engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop- Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit ped under certain conditions. green. The engine starts automatically when the Rthe off-road program is deactivated. driver wants to pull away again. The ECO Rthe outside temperature is within the range start/stop function thereby helps you to that is suitable for the system. reduce the fuel consumption and emissions R of your vehicle. the engine is at normal operating temperature. Important safety notes Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. G WARNING Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. If the engine is switched off automatically and Rthe system detects that the windshield is you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted not fogged up when the air-conditioning automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. system is switched on. There is a risk of accident and injury. Rthe hood is closed. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's the ignition and secure the vehicle against seat belt is fastened. rolling away. i All of the vehicle's systems remain active General notes when the engine is stopped automatically. i The HOLD function can also be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the : ECO start/stop display HOLD function is deactivated. If the engine has been switched off automat- i The engine can be switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the ically a maximum of four times (first stop and three subsequent stops) in succession.

Z 146 Driving

Automatic engine start If the indicator lamp on the ECO button is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deac- The engine starts automatically if: tivated manually or as the result of a mal- Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function function. by pressing the ECO button. Rin transmission position D or N the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is rking not active. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou engage reverse gear R. Ryou move the transmission out of position P. Ryou activate the off-road program. R

Driving and pa you unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door. Rthe vehicle starts to roll. Rthe brake system requires this. Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- ates from the set range. Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low. i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function

X To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. Driving 147

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. start. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 181) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 174). X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. can be heard. X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before attempting to start the engine again. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 143). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain Driving and parking the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or start. You cannot hear discharged. the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 315). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 148 Automatic transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine is not run- There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical ning smoothly and is component of the engine management system. misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it.

The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently. more than 248 ‡ X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to (120 †). The coolant cool down.

Driving and parking warning lamp may also X Check the coolant level (Y page 295). Observe the warning be lit and a warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. tone may sound.

Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Important safety notes Overview of transmission positions G WARNING All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): the If the engine speed is above the idling speed DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the and you engage transmission position D or R, steering column. the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is For information on the selector lever in AMG a risk of an accident. vehicles (Y page 150). When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- j Park position with parking lock cle from rolling away by applying the parking k Reverse gear brake. i Neutral h Drive i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the Automatic transmission 149

transmission position display (Y page 149) i The automatic transmission shifts into in the multifunction display. park position P automatically: Rif you open the driver's door while the Transmission position and drive pro- vehicle is stationary in transmission posi- gram display tion D or R The current transmission position and drive Rif you open the door while traveling at program appear in the multifunction display. very low speeds in transmission position D or R In addition, a warning tone sounds and a display message is shown. i Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disen- gages the parking lock. The transmission is

in N neutral. Driving and parking : Transmission position display ; Drive program display At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡(Ò20 †), you can only shift out of park i The arrows in the transmission position position P into another transmission posi- display show how and into which transmis- tion when the engine is running. sion positions you can change using the In order to shift from park position P DIRECT SELECT lever. directly into R or D: ! If the transmission position display in the Rdepress the brake pedal and multifunction display is not working, you Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or should pull away carefully to check whether down past the first point of resistance the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select trans- ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi- mission position D and drive program E or cle is moving, do not shift the automatic S. transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmis- Engaging park position P sion could otherwise be damaged.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc- Engaging reverse gear R tion of arrow P. Transmission position display P is shown in ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R the multifunction display. when the vehicle is stationary. i When you engage park position P, make i The ECO start/stop function is not avail- sure that the transmission position display able when reverse gear is engaged. shows P in the multifunction display. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 145). i You can only engage park position P when X the vehicle is stationary. When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.

Z 150 Automatic transmission

Shifting to neutral N Engaging drive position D X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past to the first point of resistance. the first point of resistance. If the engine has been switched off, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to N. Selector lever Remaining in neutral N If the automatic transmission is to remain in neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car washes with a towing device, please observe the following instructions:

Driving and parking G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button Roperate the vehicle's equipment. j Park position with parking lock Additionally, children could set the vehicle in k Reverse gear motion if, for example, they: i Neutral h Rrelease the parking brake. Drive R shifting the automatic transmission out of Transmission position and drive pro- P park position gram display RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. Example : Transmission position display RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the ; brake pedal and keep it depressed. Drive program display RShift to neutral N. The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. RRelease the brake pedal. RIf the electric parking brake is engaged, release it. RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart- Key in the ignition lock. Automatic transmission 151

Engaging park position P A Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. When you switch off the engine, the X When the vehicle is stationary, press P but- automatic transmission automati- ton :. cally shifts into neutral N. 7 Drive Driving and parking The automatic transmission Transmission positions changes gear automatically. All B Park position forward gears are available. Do not shift the transmission into Y position P ( page 159) unless the Driving tips vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake Changing gear when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addi- The automatic transmission shifts to the indi- tion to the parking lock in order to vidual gears automatically when it is in trans- D secure the vehicle. mission position . This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by: If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may Rthe selected drive program (Y page 152) be locked in position P. Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Have the vehicle electronics (Y page 151) checked immediately at a qualified Rthe road speed specialist workshop. Accelerator pedal position C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R Your style of driving influences how the auto- when the vehicle is stationary. matic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts

Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients

G WARNING If the clutch overheats, the electronic management system is automatically deactivated.

Z 152 Automatic transmission

This interrupts the power transmission. The Rocking the vehicle free vehicle may, for example, roll backwards on Shifting the transmission repeatedly between gradients. There is a risk of an accident. gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if it Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill has become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi- gradients by depressing the accelerator. cle's engine management system limits the speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehi- shifting back and forth. To shift back and forth cle stationary on uphill gradients by depress- between transmission positions D and R, ing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch over- move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down heats, a warning tone sounds. past the point of resistance. All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): the Stop Vehicle Shift to P Leave Engine Running display message appears in the mul- Program selector button tifunction display. You will only be able to

Driving and parking continue your journey once the clutch has General notes cooled down and the display message in the The program selector button allows you to multifunction display has disappeared. choose between drive programs with differ- AMG vehicles: the Trans. Oil Overhea‐ ent driving characteristics. ted Drive on with Care display message appears in the multifunction display. Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator. Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by: Rdepressing the brake pedal Ractivating the HOLD function Rengaging the electric parking brake

Kickdown Example: program selector button AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kick- E Economy Comfortable, economical down in temporary manual drive program M. driving For further information on manual drive program M (Y page 154). S Sport Sporty driving style Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. M Manual Manual gear shifting X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. X Press program selector button : repeat- The automatic transmission shifts to a edly until the letter for the desired gearshift lower gear depending on the engine speed. program appears in the multifunction dis- X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the play. desired speed is reached. i The automatic transmission shifts back up. The automatic transmission shifts to automatic drive program E each time the engine is started. Automatic transmission 153 i For further information on the automatic Steering wheel paddle shifters drive program, see (Y page 153).

AMG vehicles

: Left steering wheel paddle shifter (shifts down) ; Right steering wheel paddle shifter (shifts Driving and parking up) C Controlled Comfortable, economical Efficiency driving In drive program M, you can change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shift- S Sport Sporty driving style ers. M Manual Manual gear shifting If you pull the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter when in automatic drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S, the X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift automatic transmission shifts into drive pro- M program appears in the multifunction dis- gram for a limited time. Depending on play. which paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next i The automatic transmission shifts to gear down or up. automatic drive program C each time the AMG vehicles: you can activate drive pro- engine is started. gram M RACE START (Y page 183) using the i For further information on the automatic steering wheel paddle shifters. drive program, see (Y page 153). i You can only change gear with the steering wheel paddle shifters when the transmission is in position D. i For further information on the manual drive program, see (Y page 154).

Automatic drive program Drive program E (drive program C on MAG vehicles) is characterized by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine settings. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner.

Z 154 Automatic transmission

R the vehicle pulling away more gently in 5 You can use the braking effect of forward and reverse gears, unless the the engine on downhill gradients accelerator pedal is depressed fully. and for driving: R increased sensitivity. This improves driving R stability on slippery road surfaces, for on steep mountain roads R example. in mountainous terrain R Rthe automatic transmission shifting up in arduous conditions sooner. This results in the vehicle being 4 To use the braking effect of the driven at lower engine speeds and the engine on extremely steep downhill d parking wheels being less likely to spin. gradients and on long downhill Drive program S is characterized by the fol- stretches lowing: Rsporty engine settings Switching on the manual drive program R Driving an the automatic transmission shifting up Activating permanently later X Press the program selector button Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher (Y page 152) repeatedly until M appears in as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points the multifunction display. Manual drive program M remains active until drive program E (drive program C on Manual drive program AMG vehicles) or S is selected. Introduction Activating temporarily X Pull the right or left steering wheel paddle M In manual drive program , you can change shifter (Y page 153). gear yourself by using the steering wheel pad- M is shown in the multifunction display. dle shifters. For this, the transmission must Manual drive program M is temporarily be in position D. The gear currently selected active. Depending on which paddle shifter and engaged is shown in the multifunction is pulled, the automatic transmission display. immediately shifts into the next gear down Manual drive program M differs from drive or up. programs E (drive program C on AMG vehi- i cles) and S with regard to spontaneity, When manual drive program M is activa- responsiveness and smoothness of gear ted via the steering wheel paddle shifters, changes. the temporarily active manual drive program M will be deactivated automatically Gear Driving situations after a limited time, if the driving situation = You can use the engine's braking permits. The automatic transmission effect switches to the previously activated drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S. When driving on downhill gradients, the temporarily active manual drive program M will only be deactivated if the accelerator pedal is depressed while the vehicle is rolling downhill. Automatic transmission 155

Upshifting AMG vehicles X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle ! In manual drive program M, the automatic shifter (Y page 153). transmission does not shift up automati- The automatic transmission shifts up to the cally even when the engine limiting speed next gear. for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): in supply is cut to prevent the engine from order to prevent engine damage the auto- overrevving. Always make sure that the matic transmission automatically shifts up: engine speed does not reach the red area of Rif the maximum engine speed on the cur- the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of rently engaged gear is reached and engine damage. Ryou continue to accelerate. AMG vehicles:

! In manual drive program M, the automatic Driving and parking transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel : Gear indicator supply is cut to prevent the engine from ; Upshift indicator overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of Before the engine speed reaches the red area, the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul- engine damage. tifunction display. X If the color in the speedometer multifunc- Shift recommendation tion display changes to red and the UP display message is shown, shift up a gear. The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The rec- Downshifting ommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 153). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down. X Shift to recommended gear ; according i For maximum acceleration, pull the left- to gearshift recommendation : when hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the shown in the multifunction display of the transmission selects the optimum gear for instrument cluster. the current speed. i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down.

Z 156 Automatic transmission

Kickdown AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kickdown in temporary manual drive program M. You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a d parking lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. i During kickdown, you cannot shift gears

Driving an using the steering wheel paddle shifters. i If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving.

Switching off the manual drive program X Press the program selector button (Y page 152) repeatedly until E (drive program C in AMG vehicles) or S appears in the multifunction display. Deactivating the temporary manual drive program X Pull and hold the right steering wheel paddle shifter until the automatic transmission shifts into the last active automatic drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S.

i When manual drive program M is deactivated, the automatic transmission in automatic drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S may shift from the current gear into a higher or lower gear. This is dependent on the position of the accelerator pedal, speed and load. Refueling 157

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. X Stop the vehicle. The transmission no X Shift the transmission to position P. longer shifts into all of X Switch off the engine. the gears. X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. Reverse gear can no X Shift the transmission to position D. longer be engaged. Driving and parking X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Refueling clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. Important safety notes RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- G WARNING tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel ing. incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- RImmediately change out of clothing which sion. has come into contact with fuel. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating G sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine WARNING and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and refueling. ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. G WARNING Always touch the vehicle body before opening Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump There is a risk of injury. nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is You must make sure that fuel does not come thereby discharged. into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing ! and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a vapors. Keep fuel away from children. gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the If you or others come into contact with fuel, wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter observe the following: the fuel system. Even small amounts of the RWash away fuel from skin immediately wrong fuel could result in damage to the using soap and water. fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali- RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, fied specialist workshop and have the fuel immediately rinse them thoroughly with tank and fuel lines drained completely.

Z 158 Refueling

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the X Switch the engine off. fuel system. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted lock. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of paintwork. arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection and remove it. system could be blocked by particles from X the fuel can. Insert the fuel filler cap into holder on the inside of fuel filler flap =. Do not get into the vehicle again during the X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place charge could build up again. and refuel. If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray X

Driving and parking Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. switches off. For further information on fuel and fuel quality i Do not add any more fuel after the pump (Y page 362). stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. Refueling Closing the fuel filler flap General information X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto- clockwise until it engages audibly. matically when you open or close the vehicle X Close the fuel filler flap. with the SmartKey. i The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed Close the fuel filler flap before locking the æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow on vehicle. the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi- i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap cle. open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multi- Opening the fuel filler flap function display (Y page 240). In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up (Y page 260). For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 260).

: To open the fuel filler flap ; Tire pressure table = To insert the fuel filler cap ? Fuel type to be used Parking 159

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. vehicle. G WARNING Risk of explosion or fire. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and remove it (Y page 143). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.

not be opened. or Driving and parking The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 76). or X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 77).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking G WARNING Important safety notes If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: G WARNING Rrelease the parking brake. Flammable material such as leaves, grass or Rshift the automatic transmission out of the twigs may ignite if they come into contact with parking position P. hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust Rstart the engine. gas flow. There is a risk of fire. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- an accident and injury. cle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain When leaving the vehicle, always take the fields. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged.

Z 160 Parking

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- rolling away unintentionally: tion lock and remove it. Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. The immobilizer is activated. Rthe transmission must be in position P and i If you switch the engine off with the trans- the transmission position display must mission in position R or D, the automatic show P. transmission shifts to N automatically. Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the If you then open one of the front doors or ignition lock. remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front automatic transmission shifts to P. wheels must be turned towards the curb. If you shift the automatic transmission to N before switching off the engine, the automatic transmission remains in N even if a Switching off the engine door is opened. Driving and parking Important safety notes i The automatic transmission shifts to P G WARNING automatically if you: R The automatic transmission switches to neu- switch off the engine using the SmartKey tral position N when you switch off the engine. and remove the SmartKey from the igni- The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an tion lock or accident. Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKey After switching off the engine, always switch and open a front door. to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- If you attempt to turn off the engine when the cle from rolling away by applying the parking selector lever is not in position P: brake. Ra message appears in the multifunction display Vehicles with automatic transmission Ra warning signal sounds All vehicles (except AMG vehicles) X Apply the electric parking brake. Electric parking brake X Shift the transmission to position P. General notes

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of AMG vehicles: an accident and injury. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Press button :. Parking 161

When leaving the vehicle, always take the Releasing SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Pull handle :. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- The function of the electric parking brake is ter goes out. dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on- board voltage is low or there is a malfunction i You can only release the electric parking in the system, it may not be possible to apply brake when the SmartKey is in position 1 or the released parking brake. 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it roll- Applying automatically ing away. The electric parking brake is applied auto- X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- matically: P tion . Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a Driving and parking It may not be possible to release an applied standstill or parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle there is a malfunction in the system. Contact stationary or a qualified specialist workshop. Rif Active Parking Assist is holding the vehi- i The electric parking brake performs a cle at a standstill function test at regular intervals while the In addition, at least one of the following con- engine is switched off. The sounds that can ditions must be fulfilled: be heard while this is occurring are normal. Rthe engine is switched off. Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt is not fastened. Rthere is a system malfunction. Rthe power supply is insufficient. Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. i The electric parking brake is not automat- Applying/releasing manually ically engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Applying X Push handle :. Releasing automatically When the electric parking brake is applied, F ! Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto- the red (USA only) or (Canada matically released if all of the following con- only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru- ditions are met: ment cluster. Rthe engine is running. i The electric parking brake can also be Rthe transmission is in position D or R. applied when the SmartKey is removed. Rthe seat belt has been fastened. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.

Z 162 Driving tips

If the transmission is in position R, the tailgate If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than must be closed. six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a If your seat belt is not fastened, the following result of lack of use. conditions must be fulfilled to automatically X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and release the electric parking brake: seek advice. Rthe driver's door is closed. i You can obtain information about trickle R you have shifted out of transmission posi- chargers from a qualified specialist work- tion P or you have previously driven faster shop. than 2 mph (3 km/h). i Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the Driving tips parking brake will be released and the vehi- General notes cle will start to move.

Driving and parking Important safety notes Emergency braking G WARNING The vehicle can also be braked during an If you switch off the ignition while driving, emergency by using the electric parking safety-relevant functions are only available brake. with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, X While driving, push handle : of the electric for example, the power steering and the brake parking brake (Y page 160). boosting effect. You will require considerably i more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk The vehicle is braked for as long as han- of an accident. dle : of the electric parking brake is Do not switch off the ignition while driving. pressed. The longer electric parking brake : handle is depressed, the greater the G WARNING braking force. If you operate mobile communication equip- During braking: ment while driving, you will be distracted from Ra warning tone sounds traffic conditions. You could also lose control Rthe Release park. brake message of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. appears Only operate this equipment when the vehicle Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada is stationary. only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdic- When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile still, the electric parking brake is engaged. phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use Parking the vehicle for a long period hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop four weeks, the battery may be damaged by before operating the telephone. exhaustive discharging. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Driving tips 163

Drive sensibly – save fuel These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with Observe the following tips to save fuel: the manufacturer's specifications. For this RThe tires should always be inflated to the reason, only have work on the engine carried recommended tire pressure. out by qualified and authorized Mercedes- RRemove unnecessary loads. Benz technicians. RRemove roof racks when they are not nee- The engine settings must not be changed ded. under any circumstances. Furthermore, all rking RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. specific service work must be carried out at RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. regular intervals and in accordance with the R Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details Have all maintenance work carried out as can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display.

ECO display Driving and pa Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in The ECO display provides feedback on how hilly terrain. economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the Drinking and driving most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your G WARNING driving style can significantly influence the Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and vehicle's consumption. driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg- ment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow Example: ECO display anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak- The ECO display consists of three bars: ing drugs. RAcceleration RConstant Emission control RCoasting G WARNING The percent value is the average value of the Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust three bars. The three bars and the mean value gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling begin at the value of 50%. A higher percent- these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There age indicates a more economical driving is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave style. the engine running in enclosed spaces with- The ECO display does not indicate the actual out sufficient ventilation. fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed Certain engine systems are designed to keep consumption. the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits.

Z 164 Driving tips

Apart from driving style, consumption is change dynamically at the beginning of the dependent on many factors such as, e.g.: journey. On longer journeys, there are Rload fewer changes. For more dynamic changes, carry out a manual reset. Rtire pressure Rcold start For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 208). Rchoice of route Relectrical consumers switched on These factors are not included in the ECO dis- Braking d parking play. Important safety notes The evaluation of your driving style is carried out using the following three categories: G WARNING R Acceleration (evaluation of all accelera- If you shift down on a slippery road surface in tion processes): an attempt to increase the engine's braking Driving an - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. especially at higher speeds There is an increased danger of skidding and - The bar empties: sporty acceleration accidents. RConstant (assessment of driving behavior Do not shift down for additional engine brak- at all times): ing on a slippery road surface. - The bar fills up: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration Downhill gradients and deceleration ! On long and steep gradients, you must - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration a lower gear in good time. This allows you to processes): take advantage of the engine's braking - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, effect. For this, you need to have selected keeping your distance and early release manual drive program M. This helps you to of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast avoid overheating the brakes and wearing without use of the brakes. them out excessively. - The bar empties: frequent braking When you take advantage of the engine's braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn i An economical driving style specially for some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur- requires driving at moderate engine face. This could cause damage to the drive speeds. train. This type of damage is not covered by To achieve a higher value in the categories the Mercedes-Benz warranty. Acceleration and Constant: i Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on downhill gradients while the manual Rdrive in drive program E. drive program M is temporarily activated: i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. the automatic transmission may switch to on the highway, only the bar for Constant the last active automatic drive program E or will change. S. The automatic transmission may shift to a higher gear. This can reduce the engine's i The ECO display summarizes the driving braking effect. characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion. For this reason, the bars Driving tips 165

Heavy and light loads RBrake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not G WARNING endanger other road users when doing so. If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the driving, the braking system can overheat. This beginning and end of a journey. increases the stopping distance and can even RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle cause the braking system to fail. There is a ahead. risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never Servicing the brakes depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and you hear a warn- ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly ing tone while the engine is running, the results in excessive and premature wear to brake fluid level may be too low. Observe the brake pads. additional warning messages in the multi- Driving and parking If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy function display. load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. The brake fluid level may be too low due to Drive on for a short while. This allows the air- brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. flow to cool the brakes more quickly. Have the brake system checked immediately. This work should be carried out at a Wet roads qualified specialist workshop. If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain ! A function or performance test should without braking, there may be a delayed reac- only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamom- tion from the brakes when braking for the first eter. If you are planning to have the vehicle time. This may also occur after the vehicle has tested on such a dynamometer, contact an been washed or driven through deep water. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to You have to depress the brake pedal more obtain further information first. Otherwise, firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the you could damage the drive train or the vehicle in front. brake system. After driving on a wet road or having the vehi- ! As the ESP® system operates automati- cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten- cally, the engine and the ignition must be tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm up switched off (the SmartKey must be in posi- the brake discs, thereby drying them more tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if: quickly and protecting them against corro- R sion. the electric parking brake is tested on a brake dynamometer (for a maximum of Limited braking performance on salt- ten seconds) treated roads Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axle raised. If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt Braking triggered automatically by ESP® residue may form on the brake discs and may seriously damage the brake system. brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.

Z 166 Driving tips

Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS) on (Y page 65). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not Driving and parking of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Front wheel Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.

Checking brake lining thickness You can measure the break pad/lining thickness using a test gauge. Color-coding (green or red) on the test gauge allows you to determine whether the brake pad/lining thickness is still sufficient. The test gauge is in the vehicle document wallet in the glove box. Rear wheel X Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable position so that you can attach test gauge A. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Move the selector lever to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Place test gauge A between the wheel's spokes on brake pad/lining =. Driving tips 167

X Hold test gauge A vertically on brake Always observe the maximum fording depth disc : and slide measuring pin ; onto values (Y page 369). brake disc :. X Check which color field ? the arrow on measuring pin ; is pointing to. Winter driving Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is G WARNING sufficient. If you shift down on a slippery road surface in Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not an attempt to increase the engine's braking sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. checked at a qualified specialist workshop. There is an increased danger of skidding and To avoid an inaccurate measurement: accidents. Rmake sure you position the wheels suitably Do not shift down for additional engine brak- Rdo not put the measuring pin on a recess in ing on a slippery road surface.

the brake disc Driving and parking G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate Driving on wet roads ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the Hydroplaning vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle If water has accumulated to a certain depth becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of on the road surface, there is a danger of fatal injury. hydroplaning occurring, even if: If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area Ryou drive at low speeds. around the vehicle are clear of snow. To R the tires have adequate tread depth. ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in window on the side of the vehicle that is not conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, facing into the wind. you must drive in the following manner: Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified Rlower your speed. specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Ravoid ruts. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road R avoid sudden steering movements. surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering Rbrake carefully. and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. Driving on flooded roads If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be ! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in stopped when moving at low speed: front or in the opposite direction create X Shift the transmission to position N. waves. This may cause the maximum per- X Try to bring the vehicle under control using missible water depth to be exceeded. corrective steering. Failure to observe these notes may result in damage to the engine, electrical systems The outside temperature indicator is not and transmission. designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. If you have to drive on stretches of road on Changes in the outside temperature are dis- which water has collected, you should never played after a short delay. drive at speeds above a walking pace.

Z 168 Driving tips

Indicated temperatures just above the freez- ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, curb or an unpaved road especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a You should pay special attention to road con- curb or a hole in the road ditions when temperatures are around freez- R ing point. a heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 327). In situations like this, the body, the undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires For more information on driving with summer could be damaged without the damage Y tires, see ( page 326). being visible. Components damaged in this Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of section (Y page 326). an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. Driving and parking If the underbody paneling is damaged, Off-road driving combustible materials such as leaves, Important safety notes grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If G WARNING these materials come in contact with hot If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or parts of the exhaust system, they can catch turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle fire. could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a In such situations, have the vehicle risk of an accident. checked and repaired immediately at a Always drive on a steep incline in the line of qualified specialist workshop. If on con- fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the tinuing your journey you notice that driving vehicle. safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to G WARNING road and traffic conditions. In such cases, Flammable material such as leaves, grass or visit a qualified specialist workshop. twigs may ignite if they come into contact with The vehicle is only designed for easily nego- hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk tiable off-road terrain and poor road surfaces. of fire. When driving off-road, substances such as When driving off road or on unpaved roads, sand, mud and water or water mixed with oil check the vehicle's underside regularly. In may get into the brakes. This could result in a particular, remove parts of plants or other reduced braking effect or in total brake failure flammable materials which have become and also in increased wear and tear. The brak- trapped. In the case of damage, contact a ing characteristics change depending on the qualified specialist workshop. material ingressing the brakes. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you detect a reduced braking effect or grinding noises, have the brake system checked in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Adapt your driving style to the different braking characteristics. Driving off-road increases the likelihood of damage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead Driving tips 169 to failure of the mechanical assembly or sys- RDrive slowly and evenly, if necessary at a tems. Adapt your driving style to suit the ter- walking pace. rain conditions. Drive carefully. Have damage REnsure that the wheels are in contact with to the vehicle rectified immediately at a quali- the ground at all times. fied specialist workshop. RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off- Do not switch to transmission position N road routes where visibility is poor. For when driving off-road. If you try to brake the safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first vehicle using the service brake, you could and survey the off-road route. lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is RCheck the depth of water before fording too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in rivers and streams. d parking reverse gear. RWatch out for obstacles. R General notes Take care when turning on an uphill or downhill slope or when driving across a H Environmental note slope. The vehicle could otherwise tip over. Driving an Protection of the environment is of primary RAlways keep the side windows and the pan- importance. Treat nature with respect. orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Observe all prohibiting signs. closed during the journey. RDo not deviate from marked routes. Read this section carefully before driving your i vehicle off-road. Do not use the HOLD function when driv- Off-road driving is only possible with the Off- ing off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gra- Road Engineering package (Y page 186). dients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on The following driving systems are specially such surfaces. adapted for driving over easily negotiable off- road terrain: Checklist before driving off-road ROff-road program (Y page 186) X Engine oil level: check the engine oil level ROff-road ABS (Y page 65) and add oil if necessary. ROff-road 4ETS (Y page 69) When driving on steep gradients, the R ® Off-road ESP (Y page 72) engine oil level must be sufficiently high to RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) ensure a correct oil supply in the vehicle. (Y page 184) X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread Observe the following notes: depth and tire pressure. RStop the vehicle before starting to drive X Check for damage and remove any foreign along an off-road route. If necessary, acti- objects, e.g. small stones, from the vate the off-road program (Y page 186). wheels/tires. RTo avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure X Replace any missing valve caps. there is always sufficient ground clearance. X Replace dented or damaged wheels. RCheck that items of luggage and loads are X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a stowed safely and are well secured loss of tire pressure and damage the tire (Y page 271). bead. Therefore, check your rims before RAlways keep the engine running and in gear driving off-road and replace them as when driving on a downhill gradient. Acti- required. vate DSR (Y page 184).

Z 170 Driving tips

Checklist after driving off-road Driving on sand ! If you detect damage to the vehicle after Observe the following rules when driving on driving off-road, have the vehicle checked sand: immediately at a qualified specialist work- RSelect the off-road program (Y page 186). shop. RAvoid high engine speeds. X Y Deactivate off-road program ( page 186). RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle X Deactivate DSR (Y page 184). shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and to the terrain. check for damage. RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist- X Clean the front and rear license plates. ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could X Clean the wheels/tires with a water jet and become stuck in loose ground. remove any foreign objects. RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if pos- X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the sible. Make sure that: Driving and parking vehicle underside with a water jet; check - the tire ruts are not too deep. for any foreign objects and damage. - the sand is sufficiently firm. X Check whether twigs or other parts of - the ground clearance of the vehicle is plants have become trapped. These sufficient. increase the risk of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bel- Tire ruts and gravel roads lows of the axle joints and propeller shafts. ! X After the trip, examine without fail the Check that the ruts are not too deep and entire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, that your vehicle has sufficient clearance. bodywork structure, steering, chassis and Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged exhaust system for damage. or bottom out and get stuck. X After driving in sand, mud, gravel, water or Observe the following rules when driving similar dirty conditions, have the following along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with checked and cleaned: loose gravel: Rbrake discs RActivate the off-road program Y Rthe wheels ( page 186). R Rbrake pads Avoid high engine speeds. R Raxle joints Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand X steering wheel paddle shifter. If you detect strong vibrations after off-road R travel, check for foreign objects in the Drive slowly. wheels and drive train and remove them if RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with the necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the wheels of one side on the center grassy balance and cause vibrations. area, if possible. Driving over poor road surfaces places greater demands on your vehicle than driving Traveling uphill on normal roads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle. This allows you to detect damage Approach/departure angle promptly and reduce the risk of an accident to G yourself and other road users. WARNING If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle Driving tips 171

could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a Hilltops risk of an accident. When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly Always drive on a steep incline in the line of reduce pressure on the accelerator immedi- fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the ately before reaching the brow of the hill. vehicle. Make use of the vehicle's own impetus to travel over the brow. RObserve the warnings for off-road driving This style of driving prevents: (Y page 168). R RFollow the line of fall when driving on slopes the vehicle from lifting off the ground on the and steep inclines. brow of a hill R RBefore driving on extreme uphill and down- the vehicle from traveling too quickly down hill gradients, select the off-road program the other side (Y page 186). Driving downhill RDrive slowly. Driving and parking RAccelerate gently and make sure that the RDrive slowly. wheels are gripping. RDo not drive at an angle down steep RAvoid high engine speeds, except when inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive driving on sandy and muddy routes with with the front wheels aligned straight. Oth- high driving resistance. erwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle and rollover. shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand to the gradient. paddle shifter before tackling steep down- RUse the left-hand paddle shifter to shift into hill gradients. a lower gear in good time on long and steep RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake downhill gradients. gently. When doing so, make sure that the vehicle is facing in the direction of the line i Hill start assist will aid you when pulling of fall. away on a hill. RCheck that the brakes are working normally For further information about hill start after a long downhill stretch. assist, see (Y page 144). i Do not switch to transmission position N Off-road ABS is activated when the off- road program is selected. when driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle using the service brake, you could At speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h), the lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is front wheels lock cyclically during braking. too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in The digging-in effect achieved in the proc- reverse gear. ess reduces the stopping distance on off- road terrain. The steerability of the vehicle Always observe the approach/departure is considerably reduced if the wheels lock. angle values (Y page 369).

Maximum gradient-climbing capability Always observe the maximum gradient climbing ability values (Y page 369).

Z 172 Driving systems

Driving systems Cruise control lever Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the

d parking vehicle is laden, you must select a low gear in good time. For this, you will need to have selected manual drive program M (Y page 154). By doing so, you will make use : To activate or increase speed of the braking effect of the engine. This ; To activate or reduce speed

Driving an relieves the load on the brake system and = To deactivate cruise control prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. ? To activate at the current speed/last stored speed Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a When you activate cruise control, the stored steady speed for a prolonged period. You can speed is shown in the multifunction display store any road speed above 20 mph for five seconds. (30 km/h). Activation conditions Important safety notes To activate cruise control, all of the following If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise activation conditions must be fulfilled: control can neither reduce the risk of an acci- Rthe electric parking brake must be dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise released. control cannot take into account the road, Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control (30 km/h). is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis- R ® tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, ESP must be active, but not intervening. for braking in good time and for staying in Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, your lane. the selector lever must be in position D. Do not use cruise control: Storing, maintaining and calling up a R in road and traffic conditions which do not speed allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Storing and maintaining the current Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- speed erating could cause the drive wheels to lose You can store the current speed if you are traction and the vehicle could then skid driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Driving systems 173

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired X Press the cruise control lever up : for a speed. higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- or down ;. ments (1 km/h increments): briefly X Remove your foot from the accelerator press the cruise control lever up : or pedal. down ; to the pressure point. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle Every time the cruise control lever is automatically maintains the stored speed. pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

i d parking Cruise control may be unable to maintain X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- the stored speed on uphill gradients. The ments (10 km/h increments): briefly stored speed is resumed when the gradient press the cruise control lever up : or evens out. Cruise control maintains the down ; to the pressure point. stored speed on downhill gradients by Every time the cruise control lever is automatically applying the brakes. pressed up : or down ; the last speed Driving an Storing the current speed or calling up the stored is increased or reduced. last stored speed i Cruise control is not deactivated if you G WARNING depress the accelerator pedal. For exam- If you call up the stored speed and it differs ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed ates or decelerates. If you do not know the to the last speed stored after you have fin- stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or ished overtaking. brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Deactivating cruise control Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- There are several ways to deactivate cruise tions before calling up the stored speed. If you control: do not know the stored speed, store the X desired speed again. Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards = . X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards or you ?. X Brake. X Remove your foot from the accelerator Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric stores the current speed or regulates the parking brake speed of the vehicle to the previously Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph stored speed. (30 km/h) RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Setting a speed Ryou shift the transmission to position N Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment while driving until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a the speed set. warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ trol Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

Z 174 Driving systems

i When you switch off the engine, the last 2. this device must accept any interference speed stored is cleared. received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the DISTRONIC PLUS device will void any warranties, and is not General notes permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and Any unauthorized modification to this automatically helps you maintain the dis- device could void the user's authority to tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi- operate the equipment. cles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes Important safety notes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. G WARNING

Driving and parking Change into a lower gear in good time on long DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: and steep downhill gradients. This is espe- Rpeople or animals cially important if the vehicle is laden. By Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- doing so, you will make use of the braking ped or parked vehicles effect of the engine. This relieves the load on R the brake system and prevents the brakes oncoming and crossing traffic from overheating and wearing too quickly. As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk warnings nor intervene in such situations. of a collision, you will be warned visually and There is a risk of an accident. acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre- Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- vent a collision without your intervention. An uation and be ready to brake. intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the G WARNING instrument cluster. Brake immediately in DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden- order to increase the distance to the vehicle tify other road users and complex traffic sit- in front or take evasive action provided it is uations. safe to do so. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between Rgive an unnecessary warning and then 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). brake the vehicle Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on Rneither give a warning nor intervene roads with steep gradients. Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the There is a risk of an accident. responsible authorities. You can refer to the Continue to drive carefully and be ready to relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if brake, in particular when warned to do so by questions are asked about this. DISTRONIC PLUS.

i This device complies with RSS-210 of G WARNING Industry Canada. Operation is subject to DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up the following two conditions: to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC ference, and Driving systems 175

PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is edly accelerate the vehicle to the stored a risk of an accident. speed. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and This speed may: try to take evasive action. Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- lane that you overtake vehicles in the left- cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- hand lane age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC R PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- be so high when driving in the left-hand lane ing or other similar situations: that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand lane Rwhen towing the vehicle If there is a change of drivers, advise the new R in the car wash driver of the speed stored.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DIS- Driving and parking TRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of Cruise control lever accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. DIS- TRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads : Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- To store the current speed or a higher erating could cause the drive wheels to lose speed traction and the vehicle could then skid ; To store the current speed or a lower speed Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow ? To store the current speed or call up the vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or last stored speed vehicles driving on a different line. A To set the specified minimum distance In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else Activation conditions covering the sensors To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of the fol- Rthere is snow or heavy rain lowing activation conditions must be fulfilled: R there is interference by other radar sources Rthe engine must be started. It may take up Rthere are strong radar reflections, for to two minutes after pulling away before example, in parking garages DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi- Rthe electric parking brake must be cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect- released.

Z 176 Driving systems

RESP® must be active, but not intervening. brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- RActive Parking Assist must not be activa- dent. ted. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- RDSR must be deactivated. tions before calling up the stored speed. If you Rthe transmission must be in position D. do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be X Briefly pull the cruise control lever fastened. (Y page 175) towards you ?.

d parking R the front-passenger door and rear doors X Remove your foot from the accelerator must be closed. pedal. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise you ? or press it up : or down ;. Driving an speed to the previously stored value. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS up : or down ; until the desired speed is set. Pulling away and driving X Remove your foot from the accelerator i The vehicle can also pull away when it is pedal. facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle in front, but only up to the desired vehicle then brakes automatically. There is stored speed. a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at all i If you do not fully release the accelerator times. pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive mes- If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is sage appears in the multifunction display. deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will X If you want to pull away with DIS- be driving at the speed you determine by TRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the the position of the accelerator pedal. brake pedal. You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when X Briefly pull the cruise control lever stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is (Y page 175) towards you ?. 18 mph (30 km/h). or X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards X Accelerate briefly. you ? or press it up : or down ;. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehi- Activating at the current speed/last cle accelerates to the set speed. stored speed If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC G WARNING PLUS operates in the same way as cruise If you call up the stored speed and it differs control. from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in ates or decelerates. If you do not know the front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. Driving systems 177

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving There is a risk of an accident. vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off The vehicle is only accelerated up to the DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle speed you have stored. against rolling away. Selecting the drive program For further information on deactivating DIS- DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving TRONIC PLUS (Y page 178). style when you have selected the S or M driv- If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in ing program (Y page 152). Acceleration front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is stationary. is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E driving program, the vehicle Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains accelerates more gently. This setting is rec- stationary and you do not need to depress the ommended in stop-and-start traffic. brake. i Changing lanes After a time, the electric parking brake Driving and parking secures the vehicle and relieves the service If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC brake. PLUS supports you when: i Depending on the specified minimum dis- Ryou are driving faster than 43.5 mph tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill (70 km/h) at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in R DISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis- front. The specified minimum distance is tance to a vehicle in front set using the control on the cruise control Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal lever. R DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger The electric parking brake automatically of collision secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is activated and: accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted Rthe seat belt is unfastened and the driver's if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis- door is open. tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in R front becomes too small. the engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ Stopping stop function. G WARNING Ra system malfunction occurs. When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked Rthe power supply is not sufficient. only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in may be shifted into position P automatically. the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated Setting a speed with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi- Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment cle occupant or from outside the vehicle. until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to Rthe electrical system in the engine com- the speed set. partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

Z 178 Driving systems

see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 179). i Make sure that you maintain the minimum distance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary.

: To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To store the current speed or a lower speed Driving and parking X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- X To increase: turn control = in direc- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly tion ;. : press the cruise control lever up or DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater ; down to the pressure point. distance between your vehicle and the Every time the cruise control lever is vehicle in front. pressed up : or down ; the last speed X To decrease: = stored is increased or reduced. turn control in direction :. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter ments (10 km/h increments): briefly distance between your vehicle and the : press the cruise control lever up or vehicle in front. down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS stored is increased or reduced. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can Driving systems 179

There are several ways to deactivate DIS- DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru- TRONIC PLUS: ment cluster X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- Displays in the speedometer wards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accel- Driving and parking erator pedal. Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed- DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva- ometer ted if: When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if two segments ; in the set speed range light the vehicle is automatically secured with up. the electric parking brake If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front = and stored speed : light up. Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position i Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards For design reasons, the speed displayed you in order to pull away and the front- in the speedometer may differ slightly from passenger door or one of the rear doors is the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. open Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti- Rthe vehicle is skidding vated Ryou activate DSR Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐ TRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

: Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle

Z 180 Driving systems

In the Assistance menu (Y page 213) of the Cornering, going into and coming out of a on-board computer, you can select the assis- bend tance display. X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 213). Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-

Driving and parking cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles traveling on a different line

: Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable = Own vehicle ? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated) X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles Y ( page 213). traveling on a different line. The distance to You will initially see the stored speed for the vehicle in front will be too short. about five seconds when you activate DIS- Other vehicles changing lanes TRONIC PLUS.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Driving systems 181

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi- Crossing vehicles cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles d parking

DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating

DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with cross- Driving an ing traffic, for example, could cause your vehi- DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the cle to pull away unintentionally. vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. HOLD function Obstructions and stationary vehicles Important safety notes

G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta- partment, the battery or the fuses have cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the been tampered with. detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals Rthe battery is disconnected an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC There is a risk of an accident. PLUS will not brake for these. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Z 182 Driving systems

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function Activating the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash Example: vehicles with a color multifunction dis- Deactivating the HOLD function play (Y page 182). X Make sure that the activation conditions General notes are met. X Depress the brake pedal. The HOLD function can assist the driver in the X Quickly depress the brake pedal further Driving and parking following situations: until : appears in the multifunction dis- Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep play. slopes The HOLD function is activated. You can Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes release the brake pedal. R when waiting in traffic i If depressing the brake pedal the first The vehicle is kept stationary without the time does not activate the HOLD function, driver having to depress the brake pedal. wait briefly and then try again. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the Deactivating the HOLD function accelerator pedal to pull away. The HOLD function is deactivated automati- Activation conditions cally if: Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic You can activate the HOLD function if: transmission: only when the transmission Rthe vehicle is stationary is in position D or R. Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto- Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles matically switched off by the ECO start/ with automatic transmission. stop function Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt certain amount of pressure until : disap- is fastened pears from the multifunction display. Rthe electric parking brake is released Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric Rthe transmission position D, R or N is parking brake. engaged while driving a vehicle with an Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. automatic transmission i After a time, the electric parking brake R DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. Driving systems 183

The electric parking brake automatically Activating RACE START secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot activated and: and keep it depressed. R the driver's door is open and the driver's X Pull and hold both steering wheel shift pad- seat belt is unfastened. dles. R the engine is switched off, unless it is auto- X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP matically switched off by the ECO start/ Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears stop function. in the multifunction display. R a system malfunction occurs. X Release both steering wheel shift paddles. R the power supply is not sufficient. i If the activation conditions are no longer On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The is a malfunction, the transmission may also RACE START Not Possible See Opera‐ automatically be shifted into position P. tor's Manual message appears in the

multifunction display. Driving and parking X RACE START To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 153). Important safety notes or RACE START enables optimal acceleration X To confirm: pull the right steering wheel from a standing start. The precondition for paddle shifter (Y page 153). this is a suitable high-grip road surface. The RACE START Available Depress RACE START is intended solely for activation gas pedal message appears in the multi- on dedicated race circuits. function display. i i If you do not depress the accelerator RACE START is only available in AMG vehi- pedal within a few seconds, RACE START is cles. canceled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Canceled message. Conditions for activation X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. You can activate RACE START if: The engine speed is increased. Rthe doors, hood and the tailgate are closed. The RACE START Release brake to Rthe engine is running and the transmission, start message appears in the multifunc- all-wheel drive clutch and the engine are at tion display. operating temperature. i If you do not release the brake pedal RSPORT handling mode is activated. within a short time, RACE START will be (Y page 70) canceled. The multifunction display shows Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead the RACE START Canceled message. position. X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake accelerator pedal depressed. pedal is depressed (left foot). The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel- Rthe transmission is in position D. eration. Rdrive program M is selected (Y page 152). The RACE START Active message appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S is acti-

Z 184 Driving systems

vated. SPORT handling mode remains activa- DSR ted. Important safety notes RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during i DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is only RACE START or if any of the activation condi- available for vehicles with the Off-Road tions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Engineering package. Not Possible or RACE START Canceled DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down- message appears in the multifunction dis- hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed play. selected on the on-board computer. The i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the short period of time, it is only available DSR braking effect on the vehicle. When driv- again after the vehicle has been driven a ing on flat stretches of road or on an uphill certain distance. gradient, the DSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent. Driving and parking DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is 4MATIC activated and the transmission is in position 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per- D, R or N. You can drive at a higher or a lower manently driven. Together with ESP®, it speed than that set on the on-board computer improves the traction of your vehicle when- at any time by accelerating or braking. ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can grip. neither reduce the risk of accident nor over- If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC ride the laws of physics. DSR cannot take can neither reduce the risk of accident nor account of road, weather and traffic condi- override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot tions. DSR is only an aid. You are responsible take account of road, weather and traffic con- for the distance to the vehicle in front, for ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for responsible for the distance to the vehicle in staying in your lane. front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good You are always responsible for keeping con- time and for staying in your lane. trol of the vehicle and for assessing whether If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: the downhill gradient can be managed. DSR may not always be able to keep to the set R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as speed, depending on road surface and tire necessary when pulling away. conditions. Select a set speed suitable for the RAccelerate less when driving. prevailing conditions and when necessary, ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle apply the brakes manually. raised. This may damage the transfer case. G WARNING Damage of this sort is not covered by the If the speed driven and the set speed deviate Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All and you activate DSR on a slippery road sur- wheels must remain either on the ground or face, the wheels may lose traction. There is an be fully raised. Observe the instructions for increased danger of skidding and accidents. towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. Before switching DSR on, please take into consideration the road surface and the differ- i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum ence between driving speed and the set effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if speed. you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. Driving systems 185

Further information about "Driving off-road" Display in the assistance graphic (Y page 168).

Activating/deactivating DSR If you activate DSR and no speed has been set, the vehicle decelerates to 3 mph (6 km/h). Activating You can only activate DSR when driving at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 213). Driving and parking When DSR is activated symbol : appears in the assistance graphics display.

Changing the set speed while the vehicle is in motion When DSR is activated, you can change the set speed to a value between 2 mph and X Press button :. 11 mph (Canada: between 4 km/h and Indicator lamp ; lights up. 18 km/h) while the vehicle is in motion. The status indicator in the multifunction display shows, e.g. DSR 6 km/h. If the current vehicle speed is too high, the DSR icon appears in the multifunction display. You will also see the message: Max. Speed 30 km/h . If you enter or exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist, and press button :, indicator lamp ; flashes. DSR can then not be switched on. Deactivating X To increase or decrease in 1 mph incre- X Press button :. ments (Canada: 1 km/h increments): Indicator lamp ; goes out. briefly press the cruise control lever to the DSR symbol appears in the multifunction pressure point, up : for a higher set speed display with the Off message. or down ; for a lower set speed. DSR switches off automatically if you drive The set value appears in the status indica- faster than 22 mph (35 km/h). The DSR sym- tor of the multifunction display. bol appears in the multifunction display with the Off message. You also hear a warning tone.

Z 186 Driving systems

Display in the assistance graphic

Off-road program General notes i The off-road drive program is only availa- X Select the Assistance Graphic function ble on vehicles with the Off-Road Engineer- using the on-board computer

Driving and parking ing package. (Y page 213). The off-road program assists you in driving When the off-road program is activated, off-road. The engine's performance charac- symbol : appears in the assistance teristics and the gearshifting characteristics graphic display. of the automatic transmission are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and ETS programs especially adapted to off-road driving are also PARKTRONIC activated. Do not use the off-road program on roads that Important safety notes are snow-covered or icy or if you have moun- PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ted snow chains on your vehicle. ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area For information about driving off-road, see around your vehicle using six sensors in the (Y page 168). front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and Switching the off-road program on or off audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such X To switch on: press the : button. as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK- Indicator lamp ; lights up. TRONIC does not detect such objects when X To switch off: press button :. they are in the immediate vicinity of the Indicator lamp ; goes out. vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. Driving systems 187

The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. Side view PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the electric parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above Driving and parking 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

Range of the sensors Top view General notes The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function cor- PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con- rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking sideration that are: care not to scratch or damage them Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- (Y page 301). mals or objects Front sensors Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) Rear sensors Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand Minimum distance side (example) Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Z 188 Driving systems

If there is an obstacle within this range, the Transmission Warning display relevant warning displays light up and a warn- position ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be D Front area activated shown. R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas Warning displays is rolling back- activated wards The warning displays show the distance P between the sensors and the obstacle. The No areas activated warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. One or more segments light up as the vehicle The warning display for the rear area is loca- approaches an obstacle, depending on the ted on the headliner in the rear compartment. vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Driving and parking Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. : Indicator lamp The selected transmission position and the ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter- If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is mine which warning display is active when the deactivated. engine is running. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Driving systems 189

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Driving and parking Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 301). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist G WARNING General notes While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on result in a collision with another road user. both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol There is a risk of an accident. indicates a suitable parking space. Active Pay attention to other road users. Stop the steering intervention and brake application vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park- can assist you during parking and when exiting Assist parking procedure. ing a parking space. You may also use PARK- TRONIC (Y page 186). ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a Important safety notes sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate immediate surroundings. You are always parking spaces which are not suitable for responsible for safe maneuvering, parking parking, for example: and exiting a parking space. Make sure that Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited no persons, animals or objects are in the Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits maneuvering range. Ron unsuitable surfaces When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.

Z 190 Driving systems

Parking tips: G WARNING ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- If there are objects above the detection range, ing space as possible. Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely. RParking spaces that are littered or over- You may cause a collision as a result. There is grown might be identified or measured a risk of an accident. incorrectly. If there are objects above the detection range, RParking spaces that are partially occupied stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist. by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. For further information on the detection range (Y page 187). RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces at right angles to the direc- RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC tion of travel if: (Y page 188) warning messages during the Rtwo parking spaces are located directly Driving and parking parking procedure. RYou can intervene in the steering procedure next to one another to correct it at any time. Active Parking Rthe parking space is directly next to a low Assist will then be canceled. obstacle such as a low curb RWhen transporting a load which protrudes Ryou park forwards from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist does not assist you Active Parking Assist. parking in spaces that are parallel or at right RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow angles to the direction of travel if: chains are installed. Rthe parking space is on a curb RMake sure that the tire pressures are Rthe parking space is apparently blocked, always correct. This has a direct influence for example by foliage or grass paving on the parking characteristics of the vehi- blocks cle. Rthe range of movement is too small Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rthe parking space is bordered by an obsta- Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of cle which is not clearly defined such as a travel tree or a trailer Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement

Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected : Detected parking space on the left when the parking space is measured. These ; Parking symbol are not taken into account when the parking = Detected parking space on the right procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods Active Parking Assist is automatically activa- vehicles. ted when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the Driving systems 191 system independently locates and measures Parking parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. G WARNING Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll R parallel or at right angles to the direction of away if: travel Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel the voltage supply. and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide Rthe electrical system in the engine com- Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel partment, the battery or the fuses have and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your been tampered with. vehicle Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthat are at right angles to the direction of R travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider the accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

than your vehicle Driving and parking There is a risk of an accident. i In the case of parking spaces that are at Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it right angles to the direction of travel, against rolling away. please ensure that the parking space is long enough to accommodate your vehicle. i Vehicles with automatic transmission: if When driving at speeds below 19 mph PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active (30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as Parking Assist brakes automatically during a status indicator in the instrument cluster. the parking process. You are responsible When a parking space has been detected, an for braking in good time. arrow towards the right or the left also X Stop the vehicle when the parking space appears. By default, Active Parking Assist symbol shows the desired parking space in only displays parking spaces on the front- the instrument cluster. passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv- X R er's side are displayed as soon as the turn Shift the transmission to position . signal on the driver's side is activated. When The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: parking on the driver's side, this must remain % message appears in the multifunction switched on until you acknowledge the use of display. Active Parking Assist by pressing the a X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel. button on the multifunction steering wheel The system automatically determines or pull away. whether the parking space is parallel or at or right angles to the direction of travel. X To park using Active Parking Assist: A parking space is displayed while you are press the a button on the multifunction driving past it, and until you are approx- steering wheel. imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 5 mph (10 km/h) when

Z 192 Driving systems

backing up. Otherwise Active Parking Parking tips: Assist will be canceled. RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to parking space after parking is dependent a standstill when the vehicle approaches on various factors. These include the posi- the rear border of the parking space. tion and shape of the vehicles parked in Maneuvering may be required in tight park- front and behind it and the conditions of the ing spaces. location. It may be the case that Active The Park Assist Active Select D Parking Assist guides you too far into a Observe Surroundings message appears in parking space, or not far enough into it. In the multifunction display. some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should can- X Shift the transmission to position D while cel the parking procedure with Active Park- the vehicle is stationary. ing Assist. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in R the other direction. You can also engage forward gear prema- Driving and parking turely. The vehicle redirects and does not The Park Assist Active Accelerate drive as far into the parking space. Should a and Brake Observe Surroundings mes- gear be changed too early, the parking pro- sage appears in the multifunction display. cedure will be canceled. A sensible parking i You will achieve the best results by wait- position can no longer be achieved from ing for the steering procedure to complete this position. before pulling away. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all Exiting a parking space times. In order that Active Parking Assist can sup- Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to port you when you exit the parking space: a standstill. Rthe border of the parking space must be The Park Assist Active Select R high enough. A curb is too small, for exam- Observe Surroundings message appears in ple. the multifunction display. Rthe border of the parking space must not be As soon as the parking procedure is com- too wide, as the position of the vehicle must plete, the Park Assist Finished message not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehi- position as it is maneuvering into the park- cle is now parked. The vehicle is kept station- ing space. ary without the driver having to depress the R brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled a maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft when you depress the accelerator pedal. (1.0 m) must be available. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you i Vehicles with automatic transmission: with steering interventions and brake appli- If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active cations. When Active Parking Assist is fin- Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst ished, you must steer and brake again your- the vehicle exits the parking space. You are self. PARKTRONIC is still available. responsible for braking in good time. X Maneuver if necessary. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with X Always observe the warning messages dis- exiting a parking space if you have parked the played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 188). vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist. Driving systems 193

X Start the engine. then have to steer and merge into traffic on X Switch on the turn signal in the direction your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You you are pulling away. can take over the steering, before the vehicle X Shift the transmission to position D or R. has exited the parking space completely. This The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: is useful, for example when you recognize % message appears in the multifunction that it is already possible to pull out of the display. parking space. X % To cancel the procedure: press the Canceling Active Parking Assist button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any or time. X To exit a parking space using Active X Stop the movement of the multifunction Parking Assist: press the a button on steering wheel or steer yourself.

the multifunction steering wheel. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at Driving and parking The Park Assist Active Accelerate once. The Park Assist Canceled mes- and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. sage appears in the multifunction display. or X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen- X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being ter console (Y page 188). ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active maximum speed of approximately 6 mph Parking Assist is immediately canceled. (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. The Park Assist Canceled message Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can- appears in the multifunction display. celed. Active Parking Assist is canceled automati- X Shift the transmission to position D or R as cally if: required while the vehicle is stationary. Rthe electric parking brake is engaged Active Parking Assist immediately steers in R P the other direction. The Park Assist transmission position is selected Active Accelerate and Brake Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no Observe Surroundings message appears longer possible in the multifunction display. Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) i You will achieve the best results by wait- Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The ing for the steering procedure to complete ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instru- before pulling away. ment cluster. If you back up after activation, the steering A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi- disappears and the multifunction display tion. shows the Park Assist Canceled mes- X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by sage. the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must times if necessary. steer again yourself. Once you have exited the parking space com- If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and accelerator again. the Park Assist Finished message appears in the multifunction display. You will

Z 194 Driving systems

Rear view camera are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. General notes Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rthe tailgate is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in

Driving and parking Rear view camera : is in the handle on the winter tailgate. Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed The rear view camera is an optical parking and Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this maneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to show event, have the camera position and setting the area behind your vehicle in the Audio/ checked at a qualified specialist workshop COMAND display. The field of vision and other functions of the The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a rear view camera may be restricted due to mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. additional accessories on the rear of the vehi- The rear view camera is protected from rain- cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack). drops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens. Activating/deactivating the rear view Only once the maneuvering process has been camera completed and the rear view camera has X switched off does the flap close again. For To activate: make sure that the SmartKey technical reasons, the flap may remain open is in position 2 in the ignition lock. briefly after the rear view camera has been X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear" deactivated. If you switch off the engine, the function is selected in the Audio system/ flap will also close. COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. i The text of messages shown in the X COMAND display depends on the language Engage reverse gear. setting. The following are examples of rear Guide lines are used to show the area view camera messages in the COMAND behind the vehicle in the Audio/COMAND display. display. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 302). To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P on Important safety notes vehicles with automatic transmission or after driving forwards a short distance. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there Driving systems 195

Displays in the Audio/COMAND display The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle d parking ! Objects not at ground level may appear to Guide lines be further away than they actually are, e.g.: ? Bumper Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle A Red guide line at a distance of approx-

Rthe drawbar of a trailer imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the Driving an vehicle Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- Rthe rear section of an HGV imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the R a slanted post vehicle Use the guidelines only for orientation. C Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) Approach objects no further than the bot- D Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- tom-most guideline. imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle The lanes and guide lines are only displayed if you have engaged reverse gear. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

Lanes : White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle, vehicle width to the outer side of the wheels (dynamic) Additional displays on vehicles with PARKTRONIC and COMAND = Red guide line for the vehicle width includ- : Front warning display ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer- ; ing wheel angle (dynamic) Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator ? Bumper = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC and COMAND: if PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 186),

Z 196 Driving systems

an additional operational readiness indicator Reverse perpendicular parking with the will appear in COMAND display ;.If the steering wheel at an angle PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or X Drive past the parking space and bring the light up, warning displays : and = are also vehicle to a standstill. active or light up correspondingly in the COMAND display.

"Reverse parking" function X Make sure that the rear view camera is d parking activated and the "Reverse parking" function is selected; see the separate operating instructions for the audio system/ COMAND. The lane and the guide lines are shown. Driving an Backing up straight into a parking space Turning the steering wheel without turning the steering wheel : Red lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position ; Parking space marking X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until the red lane reaches parking space marking ;. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully.

: White lane with steering wheel straight ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle = Red guide line at a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the vehicle X With the help of white lane :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. Backing up with the steering wheel turned X Using the white lane as a guide, carefully : Red lane indicating the route the vehicle back up until you reach the end position. will take with the steering wheel in its cur- Red guide line = is then at the end of the rent position parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Driving systems 197

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in ATTENTION ASSIST front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel General notes with the parking space marking as possi- ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, ble. monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it sug- d parking gests you take a break.

Important safety notes

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the Driving an driver. It might not always recognize fatigue Driving to the final position or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to : White lane at current steering wheel angle recognize them at all. The system is not a ; Parking space marking substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. X Turn the steering wheel to the center posi- ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of tion while the vehicle is stationary. fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length of journey The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes : Red guide line at a distance of approx- Rif there is a strong side wind imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style vehicle with high cornering speeds or high rates of ; White lane with steering wheel straight acceleration = End of parking space Rif you are predominantly driving slower X Back up carefully until you have reached than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than the final position. 112 mph (180 km/h) Red guide line : is then at end of parking Rif you are currently using COMAND or mak- space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in ing a telephone call with it the parking space. Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed

Z 198 Driving systems

Warning and display messages in the Blind Spot Assist multifunction display General notes X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system board computer (Y page 214). to monitor the areas on both sides of your If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be vehicle. It supports you from a speed of warned no sooner than 20 minutes after approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning your journey has begun. You then hear an display in the exterior mirrors draws your intermittent warning tone twice and the attention to vehicles detected in the moni- Attention Assist: Take a Break! tored area. If you then switch on the corre- message appears in the multifunction dis- sponding turn signal to change lanes, you will play. also receive a visual and audible collision X If necessary, take a break. warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist X Press the a or % button to confirm uses sensors in the rear bumper.

Driving and parking the message. Important safety notes On long journeys, take regular breaks in good G WARNING time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break, you will be warned again Blind Spot Assist does not react to: after 15 minutes at the earliest. The precon- Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, dition for this is that ATTENTION ASSIST still placing them in the blind spot area detects typical indicators of fatigue or Rvehicles which approach with a large speed increasing lapses in concentration. differential and overtake your vehicle ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con- As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give tinue your journey and starts assessing your warnings in such situations. There is a risk of tiredness again if: an accident. Ryou switch off the engine. Always observe the traffic conditions care- Ryou take off your seat belt and open the fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the attentive driving. é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar Lane Tracking package sensor is intended for use in an automotive General notes radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind warranties, and is not permitted by the Spot Assist (Y page 198) and Lane Keeping FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in Assist (Y page 200). any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Driving systems 199

Monitoring range of the sensors Due to the nature of the system: In particular, the detection of obstacles can Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- be impaired if: ing close to crash barriers or similar solid Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- lane borders. ing the sensors Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. rain or snow trucks, for a prolonged time. Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are motorbike or bicycle integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Rthe road has very wide lanes Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. For Rthe road has narrow lanes example, the radar sensors must not be cov- R you are not driving in the middle of the lane ered by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders Following a severe impact or in the event of Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not damage to the bumpers, have the function of Driving and parking indicated. the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator sensors in the rear bumper. lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica- lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not operational. driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring side of their lane. range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), then warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle

Z 200 Driving systems

enters the blind spot monitoring range from Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on behind or from the side. When you overtake a the road and can warn you before you leave vehicle, the warning only occurs if the differ- your lane unintentionally. ence in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). This function is available in the range between The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot 200 km/h). Assist is no longer active. A warning may be given if a front wheel The brightness of the indicator/warning passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by lamps is adjusted automatically according to means of intermittent vibration in the steer- the ambient light. ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Collision warning Important safety notes If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range G WARNING of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly Driving and parking corresponding turn signal, a double warning recognize lane markings. tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning Rgive an unnecessary warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Rnot give a warning Switching on Blind Spot Assist There is a risk of an accident. X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activa- Always pay particular attention to the traffic ted in the on-board computer situation and stay in lane, in particular if (Y page 214). warned by Lane Keeping Assist. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- G WARNING tion lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds return the vehicle to the original lane. There is and then turn yellow. a risk of an accident. You should always steer, brake or accelerate Lane Keeping Assist yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- ing Assist. General notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted at the top of the windshield. Active Driving systems 201

The system may be impaired or may not func- When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration if: tion occurs if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, cient illumination of the road, or due to the warnings are suppressed for a certain snow, rain, fog or spray period of time. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road ABS, BAS or ESP®. surface is wet) Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. R the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged Ryou brake hard. or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an vicinity of the camera obstacle or change lanes quickly. Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark- Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con- struction work In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane Driving and parking Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or marking, the system recognizes certain con- covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow ditions and warns you accordingly. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too The warning vibration occurs earlier if: small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. bend. lanes branch off, cross one another or Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a free- merge way. Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane The warning vibration occurs later if: R Switching on Lane Keeping Assist the road has narrow lanes. R X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using you cut the corner on a bend. the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (Y page 214). If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lane markings in the assistance graphics display (Y page 213) are shown in green. When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®.

Z 202 203

Useful information ...... 204 Important safety notes ...... 204 Displays and operation ...... 204 Menus and submenus ...... 207 Display messages ...... 221 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ...... 252 On-board computer and displays 204 Displays and operation

Useful information times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident. i This Operator's Manual describes all If the operating safety of your vehicle is models and all standard and optional equip- impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do ment of your vehicle available at the time of so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. publication of the Operator's Manual. For an overview, see the instrument panel Country-specific differences are possible. illustration (Y page 33). Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and Displays and operation functions. Instrument cluster lighting i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness con- Important safety notes trol knob.

On-board computer and displays The brightness control knob is located on the G WARNING bottom left of the instrument cluster (Y page 33). If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehi- X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise cle while driving, you will be distracted from or counter-clockwise. traffic conditions. You could also lose control If the light switch is set to Ã, T or of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. L, the brightness is dependent upon Only operate the equipment when the traffic the brightness of the ambient light. situation permits. If you are not sure that this i The light sensor in the instrument cluster is possible, park the vehicle paying attention automatically controls the brightness of to traffic conditions and operate the equip- the multifunction display. ment when the vehicle is stationary. In daylight, the displays in the instrument You must observe the legal requirements for cluster are not illuminated. the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. Coolant temperature display G WARNING G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function Opening the hood when the engine is over- restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The heated or when there is a fire in the engine operating safety of your vehicle may be compartment could expose you to hot gases impaired. There is a risk of an accident. or other service products. There is a risk of Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked injury. at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- Let an overheated engine cool down before ately. opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed The on-board computer only shows messages and contact the fire department. or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make ! A display message is shown if the coolant sure your vehicle is operating safely at all temperature is too high. Displays and operation 205

If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ One or two segments in the set speed (120 †), do not continue driving. The range light up. engine will otherwise be damaged. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: The coolant temperature gauge is in the The segments between the speed of the instrument cluster on the right-hand side. vehicle in front and the stored speed light Under normal operating conditions and with up. the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). Operating the on-board computer Overview Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the On-board computer and displays engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. : Multifunction display The outside temperature display is in the mul- ; Switches on the Voice Control System; tifunction display. see the separate operating instructions Changes in the outside temperature are dis- = Right control panel played after a short delay. ? Left control panel A Back button Speedometer with segments X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition The speedometer is divided into segments on lock. vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. The segments in the speedometer indicate You can control the multifunction display and which speed range is available. the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering RCruise control activated (Y page 172): wheel. The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 174):

Z 206 Displays and operation

Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume X = RCalls up the menu and menu bar ; 8 RMute 9 Press briefly: Back button : RScrolls in lists RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly: RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control a video scene System; see the separate oper- RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: ating instructions switches to the phone book and RHides display messages selects a name or telephone RExits the telephone book/redial number memory 9 Press and hold:

On-board computer and displays % Press and hold: : RIn the Audio menu: selects the RCalls up the standard display in previous/next station or selects the Trip menu an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling R In the Tel (telephone) menu: Multifunction display starts rapid scrolling through the phone book a RConfirms a selection/display message RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a call RExits phone book/redial mem- : Permanent display: outside temperature ory or speed (Y page 216) 6 RMakes or accepts a call ; Time RSwitches to the redial memory = Text field ? Menu bar A Drive program (Y page 149) B Transmission position (Y page 149) Menus and submenus 207

X To show menu bar ?: press the = this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles or ; button on the steering wheel. equipped with COMAND. Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds. Text field = shows the selected menu or Trip menu submenu as well as display messages. Standard display i You can set the time using the audio system or COMAND, see the separate operating instructions. The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: Z Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (automatic transmission) (Y page 154) X Press and hold the % button on the XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 189) steering wheel until the Trip menu with CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 172) trip odometer : and odometer ; is _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist shown. On-board computer and displays (Y page 114) ¤ ECO start/stop function Trip computer "From Start" or "From (Y page 145) Reset" ë HOLD function (Y page 181)

Menus and submenus Menu overview Operating the on-board computer (Y page 205). Example: trip computer "From Start" Depending on the equipment installed in the : Distance vehicle, you can call up the following menus: ; Time RTrip menu (Y page 207) = Average speed RNavi menu (navigation instructions) ? Average fuel consumption (Y page 209) X Press the = or ; button on the steer- RAudio menu (Y page 210) ing wheel to select the Trip menu. RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 211) X Press the 9 or : button to select RDriveAssist menu (assistance) From Start or From Reset. (Y page 213) The values in the From Start submenu are RServ. menu (Y page 215) calculated from the start of a journey whilst RSett. (Settings) menu (Y page 215) the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 218) was reset (Y page 208). The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly The From Start trip computer is automati- in vehicles with an audio system and in vehi- cally reset when: cles with COMAND. The examples given in

Z 208 Menus and submenus

Rthe ignition has been switched off for more Approximate range : that can be covered is than four hours. calculated according to your current driving R999 hours have been exceeded. style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If R9,999 miles have been exceeded. there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being The From Reset trip computer is automati- refueled C instead of the range :. cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hoursor = 99,999 miles. Recuperation display shows you if energy is being recuperated from the kinetic energy ECO display in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display = depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles.

Digital speedometer

On-board computer and displays Example: ECO display The ECO display is not available for AMG vehicles. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. : Shift recommendation (Y page 154) X Press the 9 or : button to select ; Digital speedometer ECO DISPLAY. Gearshift recommendation : is not given on If the ignition remains switched off for longer AMG vehicles. than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- X Press the = or ; button on the steer- matically reset. ing wheel to select the Trip menu. Further information on the ECO display X Press the 9 or : button to select the (Y page 163). digital speedometer. Displaying the range and current fuel Resetting values consumption

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start" X Press the = or ; button on the steer- You can reset the values of the following func- ing wheel to select the Trip menu. tions: X Press the 9 or : button to select the R approximate range : and the current fuel Trip odometer consumption ; (not for AMG vehicles). R"From Start" trip computer Menus and submenus 209

R"From Reset" trip computer Route guidance active RECO display No change of direction announced X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press the a button. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. : Distance to the destination i If you reset the values in the ECO display, ; the values in the "From start" trip computer Distance to the next change of direction are also reset. If you reset the values in the = Current road "From start" trip computer, the values in ? "Follow the road's course" symbol the ECO display are also reset. Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation On-board computer and displays Navigation system menu Displaying navigation instructions X Switch on the audio system or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Navi ing wheel to select the menu. : Road into which the change of direction In the Navi menu, the multifunction display leads shows navigation instructions. For more ; Distance to change of direction and visual information, see the separate operating distance display instructions. = Symbol for change of direction Route guidance not active When a change of direction is announced, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction.

: Direction of travel ; Current road

Z 210 Menus and submenus

Change of direction announced with a Audio menu lane recommendation Selecting a radio station

: Road into which the change of direction leads : Waveband ; Distance to change of direction and visual ; Station frequency with memory position distance display The memory position is only displayed along = Recommended lane and new lane during a with station ; if this has been stored. change of direction X Switch on the audio system or COMAND ? Lanes not recommended and select Radio; see the separate operat-

On-board computer and displays A Recommended lane ing instructions. B Change-of-direction symbol X Press the = or ; button on the steer- On multilane roads, new lane recommenda- ing wheel to select the Audio menu. tions can be displayed for the next change of X To select a stored station: briefly press direction if the digital map supports this data. the 9 or : button. During the change of direction, new lanes X To select a station from the station list: may be added. press and briefly hold the 9 or : Recommended lane and new lane during a button. change of direction =: in this lane you will be If no station list is received: able to complete the next two changes of X To select a station using the station direction without changing lane. search: press and briefly hold the 9 Lane not recommended ?: you will not be or : button. able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. i For information on changing waveband Recommended lane A: in this lane you will and storing stations, see the separate oper- only be able to complete the next change of ating instructions. direction without changing lane. i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. Other status indicators of the naviga- For more information on satellite radio tion system operation, see the separate operating RO: you have reached the destination or an instructions. intermediate destination. RNew Route... or Calculating Route: calculating a new route. ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (off-map position). RNo Route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination. Menus and submenus 211

Operating an audio player or audio X Switch on the audio system or COMAND media and select video DVD; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 Example: CD/DVD changer display or : button until desired scene : has : Current title been reached. Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. Telephone menu X Switch on the audio system or COMAND Introduction and select audio CD or MP3 mode, see the separate operating instructions. G WARNING On-board computer and displays X Press the = or ; button on the steer- If you operate information systems and coming wheel to select the Audio menu. munication equipment integrated in the vehi- X To select the next/previous track: cle while driving, you will be distracted from briefly press the 9 or : button. traffic conditions. You could also lose control X To select a track from the track list of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 Only operate the equipment when the traffic or : button until desired track has been situation permits. If you are not sure that this reached. is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- If you press and hold 9 or :, the ment when the vehicle is stationary. rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this When telephoning, you must observe the function. legal requirements for the country in which If track information is stored on the audio you are currently driving. device or medium, the multifunction display X Switch on the mobile phone; see the sepa- will show the number and title of the track. rate operating instructions. The current track does not appear in audio X Switch on the audio system or COMAND; AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external see the separate operating instructions. audio source connected). X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the Video DVD operation audio system or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.

DVD changer display (example)

Z 212 Menus and submenus

You will see one of the following display mes- X Press the 9 or : button to select the sages in the multifunction display: desired name. RTelephone Ready or the name of the net- or work provider: the mobile phone has found X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold a network and is ready to receive. the 9 or : button for longer than RTelephone No Service: there is no net- one second. work available or the mobile phone is Rapid scrolling stops when you release the searching for a network. button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored Accepting a call for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the On-board computer and displays number you want to dial. Example: incoming call X Press the 6 or a button to start dial- X Press the 6 button on the steering ing. wheel to accept an incoming call. or If someone calls you when you are in the Tel X To exit the telephone book: press the menu, a display message appears in the mul- ~ or % button. tifunction display. You can accept a call even if you are not in the Redialing Tel menu. The on-board computer saves the last names Rejecting or ending a call or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the ~ button on the steering ing wheel to select the Tel menu. wheel. X Press the 6 button to switch to the You can end or reject a call even if you are not redial memory. in the Tel menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. Dialing an entry from the phone book X Press the 6 or a button to start dial- X Press the = or ; button on the steering. ing wheel to select the Tel menu. or X Press the 9, : or a button to X If you do not want to make a call: press switch to the phone book. the ~ or % button. X Authorize access to the phone book on the phone. Menus and submenus 213

Assistance menu The assistance graphic displays the status of and information from the following driving Introduction systems or driving safety systems: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 179) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 66) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 197) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 200) RDSR (Y page 184) In the DriveAssist menu, you have the fol- ROff-road program (Y page 186) lowing options: RRear window wiper (Y page 122) RDisplaying the assistance graphic (Y page 213) Deactivating/activating ESP®

R ® oard computer and displays Activating/deactivating ESP Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 213) in the description of ESP (Y page 69). RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PRE- On-b G WARNING VENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 214) ® ® RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION If you deactivate ESP , ESP no longer sta- ASSIST (Y page 214) bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist ® (Y page 214) Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping bed in the following. Assist (Y page 214) It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Assistance graphic Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehicles (Y page 70). For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 68). X Start the engine. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the 9 or : button to select ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. ESP. X Press 9 or : to select Assistance Graphic. X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the DIS- TRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic.

Z 214 Menus and submenus

X Press the a button. tion display in the assistance graphics dis- The current selection is displayed. play. X To activate/deactivate: press the a For further information about ATTENTION button again. ASSIST, see (Y page 197). ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up Activating/deactivating Blind Spot continuously when the engine is running. Assist If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn- X Press the = or ; button on the steer- ® ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP is not ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. available due to a malfunction. X Press the 9 or : button to select Observe the information on warning lamps Blind Spot Assist. Y ( page 256). X Press the a button. Observe the information on display messages The current selection is displayed. Y ( page 222). X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. Activating/deactivating COLLISION On-board computer and displays PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 198). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping X Press the 9 or : button to select Assist Collision Prevent. Assist. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the a button. ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. The current selection is displayed. X Press the 9 or : button to select X To activate/deactivate: press the a Lane Keeping Assist. button again. X a When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Press the button. PLUS is deactivated, the æ symbol The current selection is displayed. appears in the multifunction display in the X Press a to confirm. assistance graphics display. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, Standard Adaptive For further information about COLLISION or . PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 66). X Press the a button to save the setting. When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the Activating/deactivating ATTENTION multifunction display shows the lane mark- ASSIST ings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- For further information about Lane Keeping ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Assist, see (Y page 200). X Press the 9 or : button to select ATTENTION ASSIST. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunc- Menus and submenus 215

Maintenance menu Instrument cluster Selecting the unit of measurement for distance You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or kilometers. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Sett In the Serv. menu, you have the following ing wheel to select the menu. options: X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster RCalling up display messages in message submenu. memory (Y page 221) X Press a to confirm. RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning X Press the : or 9 button to select the system (Y page 331) Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func- RChecking the tire pressure electronically tion. km (Y page 332) You will see the selected setting: or miles. On-board computer and displays RCalling up the service due date X a (Y page 296) Press the button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Settings menu Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu Introduction Rthe odometer and the trip odometer Rthe trip computer Rthe current consumption and the range Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display In the Sett. menu, you have the following Switching the additional speedometer options: on/off RChanging the instrument cluster settings The Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer RChanging the light settings [mph] function allows you to choose whether RChanging the vehicle settings the multifunction display in the status area km/h mph R always shows the speed in or in Changing the convenience settings instead of the outside temperature. RRestoring the factory settings X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm.

Z 216 Menus and submenus

X Press the : or 9 button to select the Further information on daytime running Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer lamps (Y page 111). [mph] function. Setting the brightness of the ambient You will see the selected setting: on or off. lighting X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Selecting the permanent display function ing wheel to select the Sett menu. You can determine whether the multifunction X Press the : or 9 button to select the display permanently shows your speed or the Light submenu. outside temperature. X Press a to confirm. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the : or 9 button to select the ing wheel to select the Sett menu. Amb. Light +/- function. X Press the : or 9 button to select the You will see the selected setting. Instrument Cluster submenu. X Change the setting with a. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the X Press the : or 9 button to select the brightness to a level from Off to Level 5 On-board computer and displays Permanent Display function. (bright). You will see the selected setting Outside X Press the a or % button to save the Temperature or Speedometer [km/h]/ setting. Speedometer [mph]. Activating/deactivating surround light- X Press the a button to save the setting. ing and exterior lighting delayed switch- i The speed is highlighted in km/h or in off mph conversely to your speedometer. If you have activated the Surround Light‐ ing function and the light switch is set to Lights Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Switching the daytime running lamps on/ Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting off remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking Canada only: daytime running lamps are with the key. If you start the engine, the required by law. You cannot set the Daytime surround lighting is switched off and auto- Running Lights function via the on-board matic headlamp mode is activated computer. (Y page 111). X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the ing wheel to select the Sett menu. exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds X Press the : or 9 button to select the after the engine is switched off. If you close Light submenu. all the doors and the tailgate, the exterior X Press a to confirm. lighting goes off after 15 seconds. X X Press the : or 9 button to select the Press the = or ; button on the steer- Daytime Running Lights function. ing wheel to select the Sett menu. If the Daytime Running Lights function X Press the : or 9 button to select the has been switched on, the cone of light and Light submenu. the W symbol in the multifunction dis- X Press a to confirm. play are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Menus and submenus 217

X Press the : or 9 button to select the displayed in orange in the multifunction Surround Lighting function. display. When the Surround Lighting function is X Press the a button to save the setting. activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in orange Vehicle in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu. X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart- X : 9 Key to position 0 in the ignition lock. Press the or button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Press a to confirm. tion lock. X The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is Press the : or 9 button to select the deactivated. Automatic Door Lock function. When the Automatic Door Lock function

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed On-board computer and displays reactivated the next time you start the in orange in the multifunction display. engine. X Press the a button to save the setting. i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, If you activate the Automatic Door Lock when the surround lighting and delayed function, the vehicle is centrally locked above switch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol- a speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). lowing light up: R For further information on the automatic lock- Parking lamps ing feature, see (Y page 82). RFront fog lamps RLow-beam headlamps Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal RDaytime running lamps If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, RSide marker lamps an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the R Surround lighting in the exterior mirrors vehicle. Activating/deactivating the interior light- X Press the = or ; button on the steering delayed switch-off ing wheel to select the Sett menu. If you activate the Interior Lighting X Press the : or 9 button to select the Delay function, the interior lighting remains Vehicle submenu. on for 20 seconds after you remove the key X Press a to confirm. from the ignition lock. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Acoustic Lock function. ing wheel to select the Sett menu. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, X Press the : or 9 button to select the the & symbol in the multifunction dis- Light submenu. play lights up orange. X Press a to confirm. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Interior Lighting Delay function. If the Interior Lighting Delay function has been switched on, the vehicle interior is

Z 218 Menus and submenus

Convenience For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lamps function in the Light submenu is only Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock- reset if the vehicle is stationary. ing feature on/off This function is only available on vehicles with the memory function (Y page 106). AMG menu in AMG vehicles When you activate the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ AMG displays ing function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror Folding function and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button on the door (Y page 103), they will not fold out automat- : Digital speedometer ically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. ; Gear indicator On-board computer and displays = Upshift indicator X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu. ? Engine oil temperature A X Press the : or 9 button to select the Coolant temperature Convenience submenu. B Transmission fluid temperature X Press a to confirm. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel X Press the : or 9 button to select the to select the AMG menu. Auto. Mirror Folding function. Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is engine has reached the overrevving range activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is when in the manual gearshift program. displayed in orange in the multifunction Upshift indicator UP = fades out other mes- display. sages until you have shifted up. X Press the a button to save the setting. If the oil temperature is below 160 ‡ (71 †), oil temperature ? is shown in blue. Avoid Restoring the factory settings driving at full engine output during this time. If the transmission fluid temperature is below X Press the = or ; button on the steer- 122 ‡(50 †), oil temperature B is shown in ing wheel to select the Sett menu. blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during X Press the : or 9 button to select the this time. Factory Setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset All Settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes. X Press a to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. Menus and submenus 219

SETUP Displaying the intermediate time

: Drive program (C/S/M) X Press the = or ; button to select ; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling Interm. Time. mode (SPORT) X Press a to confirm. SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® The intermediate time is displayed for five (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the seconds. SPORT handling mode. Starting a new lap X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. On-board computer and displays X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap X Press a to confirm New Lap. i It is possible to store a maximum of six- teen laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with Finish Lap. : Lap ; RACETIMER Stopping the RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the % button on the steering ing wheel to select the AMG menu. wheel. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the X Confirm Yes with a. RACETIMER is shown. The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you X To start: press the a button to start the stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to RACETIMER. position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the

Z 220 Menus and submenus

key to position 2 or 3 and then press a to This function is shown if you have stored at confirm Start, timing is continued. least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. Resetting the current lap X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the X Press the = or ; button to select overall evaluation is shown. Reset Lap. X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". Lap statistics Deleting all laps

: Lap On-board computer and displays If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is ; Lap time reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are = Average lap speed deleted. ? Lap length You cannot delete individual stored laps. If A Top speed during lap you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap This function is only available if you have does not have to be reset. stored at least two laps and have stopped the X Reset the current lap. RACETIMER. X Press a to confirm Reset. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi- to select the AMG menu. function display. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the X Press the : button to select Yes and lap evaluation is shown. press the a button to confirm. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. All laps are deleted. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. Overall statistics X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation.

: RACETIMER overall evaluation ; Total time driven = Average speed ? Distance covered A Maximum speed Display messages 221

Display messages General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high- priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function Y Y

( page 181) and parking ( page 159). oard computer and displays

Hiding display messages On-b X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.

Z 222 Display messages

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram), BAS (Brake Assist), the HOLD function and hill start assist Currently Unavail‐ are temporarily unavailable. able See Opera‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. tor's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes are: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete. Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient. G WARNING

On-board computer and displays The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. !÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. Inoperative See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. Operator's Manual In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. Display messages 223

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. Currently Unavail‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. able See Opera‐ tor's Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. On-board computer and displays G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 224 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. Inoperative See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. oard computer and displays If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. On-b X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a mal- ÷ function. Inoperative See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp F(USA flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic only)!(Canada release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 160). only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually. Display messages 225

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Please Release The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp Parking Brake flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 160). The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. F(USA ! The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. only) (Canada To apply: only) X Switch the ignition off. Parking Brake See X Operator's Manual Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to P. X

Consult a qualified specialist workshop. oard computer and displays

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only)/!

(Canada only) indicator lamp light up. On-b The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. or X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 160). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 226 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

oard computer and displays continues to flash: X Do not drive on.

On-b X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 349). X Shift the transmission to P. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X Shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 160). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 227

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA F(USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten only)!(Canada seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or only) released. It then goes out or remains lit. Parking Brake Inop‐ The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over- oard computer and displays erative voltage or undervoltage.

X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by On-b charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights F(USA up. only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni- only) tion was switched off. Turn On the Igni‐ X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. tion to Release the Parking Brake

Z 228 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. $(USA In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning only)J(Canada lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone only) sounds. Check Brake Fluid G WARNING Level The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). oard computer and displays X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. On-b # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Brake Pad Wear G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. Inoperative X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 229

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operation Assist Plus tional. Possible causes are: Currently Unavail‐ Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. able See Opera‐ R tor's Manual the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. oard computer and displays If the display message does not disappear:

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying On-b attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 70).

Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is malfunctioning. The dis- tion Assist Plus tance warning signal may also have failed. inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 230 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Radar Sensors At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys- Dirty See Opera‐ tems is temporarily restricted or inoperative: tor's Manual RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS RDISTRONIC PLUS Possible causes are: Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty. Rthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety system is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. All driving systems/driving safety systems are oard computer and displays operative again. If the display message does not disappear: On-b X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Switch off the engine. X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 301): Rin the radiator trim Rin the front bumper Rin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper X Restart the engine. The display message disappears. 6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. SRS Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42). Display messages 231

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus- Front Left Malfunc‐ ter. tion Service G Required or Front WARNING Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or 6 6

right. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus- oard computer and displays Rear Left Malfunc‐ ter. tion Service G Required or Rear WARNING On-b Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument Left Side Curtain cluster. Airbag Malfunction Service Required G WARNING or Right Side Cur‐ The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered tain Airbag Mal‐ unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig- function Service gered. Required There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 232 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even Airbag Disabled though: See Operator's Man‐ Ran adult ual or Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front- passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. oard computer and displays X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. On-b X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rafter this, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 51). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamps remain lit or go out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. Display messages 233

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 51).

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even Airbag Enabled See though: Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The automatic front-passenger front air bag deactivation system oard computer and displays may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied

to the seat. On-b G WARNING The air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front- passenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rafter this, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant

Z 234 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Classification System) has deactivated the front-passenger air bag (Y page 51). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON oard computer and displays indicator lamps remain lit or go out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.

On-b If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 51).

Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Corner‐ (Y page 117). ing Light or Check Right Cornering or Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Low (Y page 117). Beam or Check Right Low Beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 235

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Rear Left (Y page 117). Turn Signal or Check Rear Right or Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Front Left (Y page 117). Turn Signal or Check Front Right or Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. oard computer and displays b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective.

Check Left Mirror On-b X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Center Brake Lamp b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Brake (Y page 117). Lamp or Check Right Brake Lamp or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Tail (Y page 117). and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail or and Brake Lamps X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand high beam is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left High (Y page 117). Beam or Check Right High Beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 236 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. License Plate Lamp b The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Fog Lamp or Check Right Fog Lamp b The rear fog lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Rear Fog Lamp (Y page 117).

oard computer and displays or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. On-b b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Front Left (Y page 117). Parking Lamp or Check Front Right or Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The backup lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Backup Light (Y page 117). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Tail (Y page 117). Lamp or Check Right Tail Lamp or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp Display messages 237

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Rear Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Rear Right Sidemarker Lamp b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Daytime (Y page 117). Running Light or Check Right Day‐ or time Running Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The active light function is defective. oard computer and displays X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Headlamps On-b Inoperative b The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator's Manual b The light sensor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Auto Lamp Function Inoperative b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper- Assist Currently ative. Possible causes are: Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Z 238 Display messages

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. ! Check Coolant Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine Level See Opera‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. tor's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 295). X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ? The fan motor is faulty. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

On-board computer and displays X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other- wise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). Display messages 239

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. See Operator's Man‐ ual Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. oard computer and displays

# The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level On-b is too low. Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds. Operator's Manual X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as Start Engine See the rear window defroster and interior lighting. Operator's Manual X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long distance. The battery is being charged.

Z 240 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. Check Engine Oil X At Next Refueling Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 293). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 294). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

On-board computer and displays 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest Check Engine Oil (Y page 294). Level (Add 1 quart) X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 294). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 4 The oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, Engine Oil Level paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Low Stop Vehicle X Turn Engine Off Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 294). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 294). æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. Fuel Level Low Display messages 241

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ç There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. æ The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. Gas Cap Loose X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. oard computer and displays

Driving systems On-b Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone Attention Assist: also sounds. Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Attention Assist Inoperative Ã DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Inoperative X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. Off X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 181).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 181).

Z 242 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Assist Currently Possible causes are: Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying oard computer and displays attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). On-b X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Currently Unavail‐ Rthe sensors are dirty. able See Opera‐ Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. tor's Manual Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Clean the sensors (Y page 301). X Restart the engine. Display messages 243

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is defective. inoperative The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Can‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been celed fastened. X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active.

X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi- oard computer and displays function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally. On-b The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 189).

Park Assist Inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking ative maneuvers. Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 189). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 174). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo- Available rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 174).

Z 244 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: rently Unavailable Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. See Operator's Man‐ R ual the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying On-board computer and displays attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Adaptive Brake Assist may also Inoperative have failed. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no pended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. - - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175).

Cruise Control Cruise control is defective. Inoperative A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. - - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 172). Display messages 245

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant Tire Pressure Soon loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the wheels and tires or installed new wheels and tires. Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires is not correct. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-

lowing hazards: oard computer and displays Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed

increase. On-b Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 306). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 331).

Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes- Then Restart Run sage and has not been restarted since. Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 331).

Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 246 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Please Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 332). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 334).

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-

oard computer and displays lowing hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed

On-b increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 306). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 332). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Display messages 247

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Warning Tire Mal‐ The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The function wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Ryou could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build- up and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. oard computer and displays X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a On-b flat tire (Y page 306).

Tire Press. Moni‐ Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received tor Currently from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily Unavailable malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved.

Tire Press. Sen‐ There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several sor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐ The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. itor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. No Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.

Tire Press. Moni‐ The tire pressure monitor is faulty. tor Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 248 Display messages

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer Malfunction being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity. X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Depress Brake to You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in Start Engine position N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N, You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D Depress Brake and without starting the engine. On-board computer and displays Start Engine X Start the engine. X Depress the brake pedal. i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡(Ò20 †) you can only shift out of position P into another transmission position when the engine is running. Apply Brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to Shift from 'P' position R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal.

Transmission Not The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or in P Risk of Vehi‐ D. cle Rolling Away A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). Display messages 249

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds. Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving. when Vehicle is X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying Stationary attention to road and traffic conditions. oard computer and displays X Shift the transmission to position P.

Reversing Not Pos‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back On-b sible Service up. Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. function X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. function Stop X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Stop vehicle Shift The automatic transmission has overheated. to P Leave engine X Drive on carefully. running The automatic transmission is available again when the display message goes out. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message has disappeared.

Z 250 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Trans. Oil Overhea‐ AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated. ted Drive on with Manual drive program M and the temporarily active manual drive Care program are no longer available. The engine power output is reduced. X Allow the vehicle to cool down.

4matic Currently 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) has overheated. The vehicle is Unavailable only driven by the front wheels. X Drive on. The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly. When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available again and the vehicle is driven by all four wheels. oard computer and displays 4matic Inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front

On-b wheels. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. A The tailgate is open. G WARNING When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open. There is a risk of poisoning. X Close the tailgate. ? The hood is open. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Close the hood. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all the doors. Display messages 251

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Power Steering Mal‐ function See Oper‐ G WARNING ator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Telephone No Ser‐ Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ oard computer and displays vice receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol On-b appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Check Washer Fluid i If you do not mix antifreeze with the washer fluid in the winter months, then the washer fluid could freeze in the washer fluid reservoir. In this case, the Check Washer Fluid display message may appear in the multifunction display. X Add washer fluid (Y page 296).

Wiper Malfunction‐ The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. ing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty. Flashers Malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. tioning

Z 252 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey. Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle + The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. X Remove the SmartKey. Take Your Key from Ignition + The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Obtain a New Key

On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger After starting the to fasten their seat belts. engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds. ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened. After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases. belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds. ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out. the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat. the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 253

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The The red seat belt warn- vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly ing lamp flashes and an been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. On-board computer and displays

Z 254 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. J (Canada only) G WARNING The red brake system The braking effect may be impaired. warning lamp comes on while the engine is run- There is a risk of an accident. ning. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X On-board computer and displays Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc- The yellow ABS warning tion. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTION lamp is lit while the ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic engine is running. Stability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 255

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION The yellow ABS warning ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, EBD (elec- lamp is lit while the tronic brake force distribution), the HOLD function and hill start engine is running. assist, for example, are therefore also deactivated. Possible causes are: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete. Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can On-board computer and displays increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 256 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISION PREVEN- The yellow ABS warning TION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist lamp is lit while the for example, are also not available. engine is running. A ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. warning tone also G WARNING sounds. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

On-board computer and displays X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISION J (Canada only) PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, the HOLD function and hill start ÷å! assist for example, are also not available. The red brake warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. lamp, the yellow ESP® G WARNING and ESP® OFF warning The brake system continues to function normally, but without the lamps and the yellow functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore ABS warning lamp are lock if you brake hard, for example. lit while the engine is running. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 257

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. the vehicle is in motion. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 69).

å ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to The yellow ESP® OFF skid or if a wheel starts to spin. warning lamp is lit while G WARNING the engine is running. If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. On-board computer and displays There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 69). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M SPORT handling mode is activated. AMG vehicles only: G WARNING The yellow SPORT han- ® dling mode warning When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP is unable to lamp is lit while the stabilize the vehicle. engine is running. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations (Y page 70).

Z 258 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷å ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, the HOLD The yellow ESP® and function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. ESP® OFF warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. lamps are lit while the G WARNING engine is running. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. On-board computer and displays X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷å ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily The yellow ESP® and unavailable. ESP® OFF warning COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. engine is running. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 259

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions F (USA only) X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction ! (Canada only) display. The red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or lights up and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up. 6 The restraint system is faulty. The red restraint sys- G WARNING tem warning lamp is lit while the engine is run- The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- ning. gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be

triggered. On-board computer and displays There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42).

Z 260 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a malfunction, for example: The yellow Check Rin the engine management Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-

On-board computer and displays ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal requirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station. warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. æ The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking. warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. while the engine is run- X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler ning. cap. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defec- The red coolant warn- tive. ing lamp lights up while The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a the engine is running risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. and the coolant tem- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, perature gauge is at the paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue start of the scale. driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 261

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant level is too low. The red coolant warn- If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may ing lamp comes on be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc- while the engine is run- tioning. ning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 295). Observe the warning notes. On-board computer and displays X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air- The red coolant warn- flow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may ing lamp comes on be too low. while the engine is run- G WARNING ning. A warning tone also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).

Z 262 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 295). Observe the warning notes. X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

On-board computer and displays Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed. ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately. the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to A warning tone also brake or take evasive action. sounds. For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 66). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 263

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires. monitor warning lamp G WARNING (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. On-board computer and displays X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 306). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 332). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. h The tire pressure monitor is faulty. The yellow tire pressure G WARNING monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire malfunction) flashes for pressure. approximately one There is a risk of an accident. minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction remains lit. display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 264 265

Useful information ...... 266 Loading guidelines ...... 266 Stowage areas ...... 267 Features ...... 273 Stowage and features 266 Loading guidelines

Useful information these components to cool down before touching them. i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equip- The handling characteristics of a laden vehi- ment of your vehicle available at the time of cle are dependent on the distribution of the publication of the Operator's Manual. load within the vehicle. For this reason, you Country-specific differences are possible. should observe the following notes when Please note that your vehicle may not be transporting a load: equipped with all features described. This RNever exceed the maximum permissible also applies to safety-related systems and gross vehicle weight or the gross axle functions. weight rating of the vehicle (including occu- i Read the information on qualified special- pants). The values are specified on the vehi- ist workshops (Y page 28). cle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. RThe cargo compartment is the preferred Loading guidelines place to carry objects. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos- G WARNING sible and as low down in the cargo com- If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or partment as possible. Stowage and features not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip RThe load must not protrude above the over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle upper edge of the seat backrests. occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- RAlways place the load against the rear or larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- front seat backrests. Make sure that the den change in direction. seat backrests are securely locked into Always store objects so that they cannot be place. flung around. Secure objects, luggage or RAlways place the load behind unoccupied loads against slipping or tipping before the seats if possible. journey. RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel nets to transport loads and luggage. G WARNING RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust materials appropriate for the weight and gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate size of the load. is open when the engine is running, particu- RThe maximum load capacity of the stowage larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes well under the cargo compartment floor is could enter the passenger compartment. 55 lbs (25 kg). There is a risk of poisoning. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and Turn off the engine before opening the tail- wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. for protection. G WARNING ! Do not position the load on one part of the The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can folding cargo compartment floor only. The become very hot. If you come into contact maximum load capacity of the folding cargo with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn compartment floor is 220 lbs (100 kg). Dis- yourself. There is a risk of injury. tribute the weight evenly to avoid damaging the cargo compartment floor. Place a solid Always be particularly careful around the board under the load if necessary. Please exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow Stowage areas 267

note that the load on the cargo compart- X To open: pull handle : and open glove box ment floor will be increased when the load flap ;. is lashed down. X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages. Stowage areas i There is a pen holder at the top of the glove box flap. Stowage space Eyeglasses compartment Important safety notes

G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be

thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. d features There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be wage an thrown around in such situations.

RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- Sto X To open: press marking :. trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment RClose the lockable stowage spaces while is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. driving. Stowage compartment in the center con- RStow and secure objects that are heavy, sole hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 266).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

Illustration: vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever X To open: press the marking on cover :. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there is an open instead of a closed stowage compartment or an ashtray in the center console.

Z 268 Stowage areas

Stowage compartment in front of the arm- or MP3 player (see the separate Audio or rest (vehicles with automatic transmis- COMAND Operating Instructions). sion) Stowage compartment under the driver's seat and front-passenger seat G WARNING If you exceed the maximum load for the stowage compartment, the cover may not be able to restrain the items. Items may be thrown out of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Never exceed the maximum permissible load Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever for the stowage compartment. Stow and X To open: press the marking on cover :. secure heavy objects in the cargo compartment. i You can remove the non-slip mat and the insert for cleaning. When removing the The maximum permissible load of the stow-

Stowage and features insert you will have to overcome some age compartment is 2.6 lbs (1.5 kg). slight resistance. Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards. X To open: on vehicles with moveable armr- ests, make sure that the armrest is in the rearmost position. X Press button : and fold the armrest up. i Depending on the vehicle equipment, the armrest can be moved backwards or forwards in a longitudinal direction. i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a USB connection or a Media Interface is installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® Stowage areas 269

Stowage space in the rear If a passenger travels in the vehicle while the front-passenger seat is folded forward, they Stowage compartment in the rear center must sit in the rear seat behind the driver. console The backrest of the front-passenger seat can be folded forwards to increase the cargo compartment capacity. Once you no longer need the backrest on the front-passenger side to be used as a load surface, fold the backrest back into place.

X To open: pull down the top of stowage compartment : by the edge of the handle. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be an open stowage space above the stowage compartment. Stowage and features X To fold forward: gently push the backrest Parcel nets back. X Pull release handle : and fold the back- Parcel nets are located: rest fully onto the seat cushion until it Rin the front-passenger footwell engages. R on the back of the driver's and the front- X To fold back: gently push the backrest passenger seat down and pull release handle :. R to the left and right-hand sides of the cargo X Fold the seat backrest back until it compartment engages. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 266) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 267). Through-loading facility in the rear Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 266). Folding backrest on the front- passenger seat G WARNING If the backrest of the front-passenger seat is folded forward, rear seat passengers can come in contact with parts of the seat mechanism. particularly in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction. There is a risk of injury.

Z 270 Stowage areas

X To open: fold down seat armrest :. level of protection and could even cause X Pull the cover, which can now be seen, for- injuries. wards by the grip until it lies on armrest :. RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com- X Pull the center head restraint on the rear partment cannot be restrained by the seat bench seat into the uppermost position backrest. (Y page 98). There is an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged.

! Before folding the backrest in the rear compartment forwards, make sure that the rear compartment armrest and the

d features cupholder are folded in. They may otherwise be damaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 266).

wage an X Slide locking mechanism = in the direc- Folding the rear seat backrest forwards tion of the arrow. and back Sto X Swing flap ; fully to the side. Folding the rear seat backrests forward Flap ; is held open by a magnet. The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr- X To close: swing flap ; in the cargo com- ests can be folded forwards separately to partment back until it engages. increase the cargo compartment capacity. X Fold the cover forwards until it engages into armrest :. X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary.

Cargo compartment enlargement Important safety notes

G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold for- X Fully insert the backrest head restraints wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the (Y page 100). event of an accident. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be forward if necessary. pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench X seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The Pull left-hand or right-hand release han- seat belt can no longer offer the intended dle ; of the seat backrest forwards. Corresponding seat backrest : is released. Stowage areas 271

X Fold backrest : forwards. Parcel shelf X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary.

! The maximum load which may be placed on the parcel shelf is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg). X : Insert the seat belt into seat-belt holder . X To remove: detach straps : from the tail- Folding the rear seat backrest back gate. X Fold the parcel shelf downwards. X Pull the parcel shelf out to the rear ;. X To install: place the parcel shelf on the Stowage and features guide rails on the left and right. X Push the parcel shelf evenly forwards using both hands until it engages. X Fold the parcel shelf up. X Attach straps : to the tailgate.

Securing cargo X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. Cargo tie-down rings ! Make sure that the seat belt does not Observe the following notes on securing become trapped when folding the rear seat loads: backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam- RObserve the loading guidelines aged. (Y page 266). X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down Red lock status indicator ; is no longer rings. visible. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down X Adjust the head restraints if necessary rings evenly. (Y page 100). RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat a load, as these are only intended as an back if necessary. anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection.

Z 272 Stowage areas

Stowage well under the cargo compartment floor Important safety notes

G WARNING If you drive when the cargo compartment floor is open, objects could be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. : Cargo tie-down rings Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey. Bag hook ! The maximum load capacity of the stow- G WARNING age well under the cargo compartment The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects floor is 55 lbs (25 kg). or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit Opening/closing the cargo compart- vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly ment floor Stowage and features changing directions. There is a risk of injury. There is a stowage area for TIREFIT, the vehi- Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. cle tool kit, a folding box, etc. underneath the Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile trunk floor. objects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure a load.

X To open: open the tailgate. X Holding ribbing ;, press handle : downwards. Handle : folds up. : Bag hook Features 273

You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section (Y page 368). An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Using handle :, swing the trunk floor X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails. In upwards as far as side flaps =, then over- doing so, observe the manufacturer's come the resistance of flaps =. installation instructions. X Place the trunk floor on side flaps =. X To close: press the trunk floor down until it Features engages. Cup holder

Important safety notes Stowage and features Roof carrier G WARNING Important safety notes The cup holder cannot hold a container secure G WARNING whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst When you load the roof, the center of gravity traveling, the container may be flung around of the vehicle rises and the driving character- and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu- istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof pants may come into contact with the liquid load, the driving characteristics, as well as and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. be distracted from the traffic conditions and There is a risk of an accident. you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only use the cup holder for con- ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you tainers of the right size. Always close the con- only use roof carriers that have been tested tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot. and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. ! This helps to prevent damage to the vehi- Only use the cup holders for containers of cle. the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Position the load on the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain dam- G WARNING age even when it is in motion. If objects in the passenger compartment are Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be equipment, you can raise the panorama thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully and There is a risk of injury, particularly in the open the tailgate fully when the roof carrier event of sudden braking or a sudden change is installed. in direction.

Z 274 Features

RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment. X To install: insert cup holder into lateral Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 266). curved sections ; in the stowage com- The stowage compartments in the doors pro- partment. Insert the cup holder so that the vide space for bottles: wedge of the upper section of cup Rfront: capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l) holder : faces forwards. Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l) X Press the cup holder downwards until it engages on the right and left-hand sides. Cup holder in the front-compartment

Stowage and features center console Cup holder in the rear seat armrest The cup holder and the rubber mat under- ! Do not sit on or support your body weight neath can be removed for cleaning. Clean on the rear seat armrest when it is folded them with clean, lukewarm water only. down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged.

X To remove: carefully pull in upper sections of cup holder : on the driver's and front- passenger sides until they release. X Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can X Fold down the rear seat armrest. be removed. X To open: press the front of cup holder : or ;. Cup holder : or ; extends automatically. X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until it engages. Features 275

Sun visors Ashtray Overview Front ashtray

G WARNING ! The stowage space under the ashtray is If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga- up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the accident. stowage space could be damaged. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving.

Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowage Stowage and features compartment X To open: push the lower section of : Mirror light cover :. ; Bracket The stowage compartment opens. = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; ? Vanity mirror and out. A Mirror cover X To re-install the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. Vanity mirror in the sun visor i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor use the resulting compartment for stow- is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A age. has been folded up. Rear-compartment ashtray Glare from the side X Fold down the sun visor. X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X Vehicles with mirror lights: slide the sun visor horizontally as desired.

Z 276 Features

X To open: pull cover = out by its top edge. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in tion lock (Y page 143). the direction of arrow ? until it audibly X To open: push the lower section of releases. cover :. X Lift insert ; up and out. The stowage compartment opens. X To install the insert: install insert ; from X Press in cigarette lighter ;. above into the holder and press down until Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati- it engages. cally when the heating element is red-hot.

Cigarette lighter 12 V sockets G WARNING Points to observe before use

d features You can burn yourself if you touch the hot X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- heating element or the socket of the cigarette tion lock (Y page 143). lighter. The sockets can be used for accessories with In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso- wage an Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls ries include such items as lamps or chargers R Sto a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to for mobile phones. objects, for example If you use the sockets for long periods when There is a risk of fire and injury. the engine is switched off, the battery may Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. discharge. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is i An emergency cut-out ensures that the out of reach of children. Never leave children on-board voltage does not drop too low. If unsupervised in the vehicle. the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This Your attention must always be focused on the ensures that there is sufficient power to traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette start the engine. lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. Socket in the front-compartment center console

Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowage compartment Vehicles with a cover over the stowage compartment Features 277

X To open: push the lower section of Socket in the cargo compartment cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Lift up the cover of socket ;.

X Lift up the cover of socket :. d features

Vehicles without a cover over the stowage com- mbrace partment X General notes Lift up the cover of socket :. wage an You must have a license agreement to acti- Socket in the rear-compartment center vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your Sto console system is activated and operational. To log in, press the ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 X : Pull cover out by its top edge. Shortly after successfully registering with the X Lift up the cover of socket ;. service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by post. USA only: you can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Cus- tomer Center Ra service subscription is available Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged Z 278 Features

i Determining the location of the vehicle on RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the a map is only possible if: following buttons continues to light up red RGPS reception is available. after the system self-diagnosis: - Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to SOS button the Customer Assistance Center. - F Roadside Assistance call button - ï MB Info call button The mbrace system RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop‐ erative or Service Not Activated To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as message appears in the multifunction dis- follows: play. X Press the W or X button on the mul- If a malfunction is indicated as outlined tifunction steering wheel. above, the system may not operate as expec- or ted. In the event of an emergency, help will d features X Use the volume controller of the audio sys- have to be summoned by other means. tem/COMAND. Have the system checked at the nearest The system offers various services, e.g.: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact R the following service hotlines: wage an Automatic and manual emergency call RUSA: RRoadside Assistance call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Sto Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RMB Info call (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 USA only: you can find information and a RCanada: Customer Service at description of all available features under 1-888-923-8367 "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Emergency call System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the Important safety notes system carries out a self-diagnosis. G WARNING A malfunction in the system has been detec- It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, ted if one of the following occurs: even if you have pressed the SOS button in an RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does emergency if: not come on during the system self-test. Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident Assistance button does not light up during Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of self-diagnosis of the system. road RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be button does not light up during self-diag- seen by other road users, particularly when nosis of the system. dark or in poor visibility conditions There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e.g. with a warning triangle. Features 279

You must have a license agreement to acti- ter attempts to get more information on the vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your emergency. system is activated and operational. To reg- RIf there is no response from the vehicle ister, press the ï MB Info call button. If occupants, an ambulance is immediately any of the steps mentioned are not carried sent to the vehicle. out, the system may not be activated. If no voice connection can be established to If you have questions about the activation, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance contact one of the following telephone hot- Center, the system has been unable to initiate lines: an emergency call. RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance This can occur, for example, if the relevant Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes mobile phone network is not available. The (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con- RCanada: Customer Service at tinuously. 1-888-923-8367 The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. General notes In this case, summon assistance by other An emergency call is dialed automatically if an means. air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. Making an emergency call Stowage and features i You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The multifunction display shows the Connecting Call message. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the X To initiate an emergency call manually: multifunction display. press cover : briefly to open. All important information on the emergency is X Press SOS button ; briefly. transmitted, for example: The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is conclu- Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter- ded. mined by the GPS system) X Wait for a voice connection to the Rvehicle identification number Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- R information on the severity of the accident ter. Shortly after the emergency call has been ini- X After the emergency call, close cover :. tiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assis- i If the mobile phone network is unavaila- tance Center and the vehicle occupants. ble, mbrace will not be able to make the RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- immediately after pressing the SOS button, you will not know whether mbrace placed

Z 280 Features

the emergency call. In this case, always The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance summon assistance by other means. Center either sends a qualified Mercedes- Benz technician or makes arrangements for Roadside Assistance button your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. Further details are available in your mbrace manual. i The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-

d features tance call button : is flashing continuously. X Press Roadside Assistance button :. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes- This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Benz Customer Assistance Center was

wage an Customer Assistance Center. established. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance This can occur if the relevant mobile phone Sto button : flashes while the call is active. network is not available, for example. The multifunction display shows the Con‐ The Call Failed message appears in the necting Call message. The audio output multifunction display. is muted. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ multifunction steering wheel. nected message appears in the multifunction or display. X Press the corresponding button for ending If a mobile phone network and GPS reception a phone call on the audio system or on are available, the system transfers data to the COMAND. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: MB Info call button Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number i The audio system or COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. X Press MB Info call button :. From the vehicle remote malfunction diagno- This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz sis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Customer Assistance Center. Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 284). Features 281

The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : X To end a call: press the ~ button on the flashes while the connection is being made. multifunction steering wheel. The multifunction display shows the Con‐ or necting Call message. The audio system X Press the corresponding button for ending is muted. a phone call on the audio system or on If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ COMAND. nected message appears in the multifunction display. Call priority If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency for example: call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all R current location of the vehicle other active calls. R vehicle identification number The indicator lamp of the respective button i The audio system or COMAND display flashes until the call is ended. indicates that a call is active. During the An emergency call can only be terminated by call, you can change to the navigation menu the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, Center. for example. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Stowage and features Voice output is not available. Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer- A voice connection is established between ing wheel the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Rthe corresponding button on the audio sys- Center and the vehicle occupants. tem or on COMAND for ending a telephone You receive information about operating your call vehicle, about the nearest authorized i When a call is initiated, the audio system Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod- is muted. The mobile phone is no longer ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz. connected to COMAND. However, if you USA only: you can find further information on want to use your mobile phone, do so only the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe http://www.mbusa.com. location. i The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Downloading destinations in COMAND Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but- Downloading destinations ton : is flashing continuously. Downloading destinations gives you access R no voice connection to the Mercedes- to a database with over 15 million points of Benz Customer Assistance Center was interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on established. the navigation system in your vehicle. If you This can occur if the relevant mobile phone know the destination, the address can be network is not available, for example. downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the The Call Failed message appears in the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor- multifunction display. tant destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to 20 way points.

Z 282 Features

You are prompted to confirm route guidance Specifying and sending the destination to the address entered. address The system calculates the route and subse- X Go to the website http:// quently starts the route guidance with the www.maps.google.com and enter a desti- address entered. nation address into the entry field. X i If you select No, the address can be saved To send the destination address to the in the address book. e-mail address of your mbrace account: click on the corresponding button on the i The destination download function is website. available if the relevant mobile phone net- i Example: work is available and data transfer is possible. If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address i The destination download function can will be sent to your vehicle. only be used if the vehicle is equipped with X When the "Send" dialog window appears: a navigation system. Enter the e-mail address you specified Route Assistance when setting up your mbrace account into This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack- the corresponding field. age and cannot be purchased separately. X Click "Send". Stowage and features i You can also use the Route Assistance i Information on specific commands such function if your vehicle is not equipped with as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found a navigation system. on the website. Within the framework of this service, you Calling up destination addresses receive a professional and reliable form of X navigation support without having to leave Switch on the ignition. your vehicle. The destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's A display message appears, asking current position and the desired destination. whether navigation should be started. You will then be guided live through the cur- X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY rent route section. the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Search & Send The system calculates the route and sub- sequently starts the route guidance with General notes the address entered. i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle i If you select No, the address can be saved must be equipped with mbrace and a navi- in the address book. gation system. Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed. i If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination "Search & Send" is a destination entry ser- must be confirmed separately. vice. A destination address which is found on Google Maps® can be transferred via mbrace i Destination addresses are loaded in the directly to your vehicle's navigation system. same order as the order in which they were sent. Features 283

If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehi- Vehicle remote closing cles with mbrace and activated mbrace The vehicle remote locking feature can be accounts: used when you have forgotten to lock the If multiple vehicles are registered under the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. same e-mail address, the destination will The vehicle can then be locked by the be sent to all the vehicles. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. Vehicle remote opening The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being You can use the vehicle remote opening if you turned off. After this time, remote locking have unintentionally locked your vehicle and may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After a replacement SmartKey is not available. 30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- remotely. Benz Customer Assistance Center. X Contact the following service hotlines: The vehicle can be immediately opened RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- remotely within four days of the ignition being tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes turned off. After this time, the remote unlock- (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 ing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After RCanada: Customer Service at 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened 1-888-923-8367

remotely. Stowage and features You will be asked for your password. X Contact the following service hotlines: The next time you are inside the vehicle and R USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- you switch on the ignition, the Doors tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Locked Remotely message appears in the (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 multifunction display. R Canada: Customer Service at USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be 1-888-923-8367 locked via: You will be asked for your password. Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed section upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer R ® Assistance Center. the telephone applications (e.g. iPhone , Blackberry) USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be To do this, you will need your identification opened via: number and password. R the Internet, under the "Owners Online" i section The vehicle remote closing feature is R ® available when the relevant mobile phone the telephone applications (e.g. iPhone , network is available and data connection is Blackberry) possible. To do this, you will need your identification number and password. i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if the corresponding mobile phone network is accessible.

Z 284 Features

Stolen vehicle recovery service X Confirm the message with Yes. X If your vehicle has been stolen: When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please start ignition message appears, turn X Notify the police. the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition The police will issue a numbered incident lock (Y page 143). report. X When the Please follow the instruc‐ X This number will be forwarded to the tions received by phone and move Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- your vehicle to a safe position. ter together with your PIN. message appears, follow the customer ser- The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance vice representative's instructions. Center then tries to locate the system. The The message in the display disappears. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote ter contacts you and the local law enforce- malfunction diagnosis is canceled com- ment agency if the vehicle is located. pletely. However, only the law enforcement agency The vehicle operating state check begins. is informed of the location of the vehicle. You will see the Vehicle diagnosis i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated activated. message. for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes- When the diagnosis is completed, the Send Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto-

Stowage and features vehicle diagnostics data//(Voice matically notified. connection may be//interrupted dur‐ ing data transfer) message appears. The Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer With the vehicle remote malfunction diagno- Assistance center. sis (Vehicle Health Check), the Customer X Press OK to confirm the message. Assistance center can provide improved sup- The voice connection with the Customer port for problems with your vehicle. During an Assistance center is terminated. existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis: Customer Assistance center. The customer Transferring data... message. service representative can use the received The vehicle data is sent to the Customer data to decide what kind of assistance is Assistance center. required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Depending on what the customer service rep- ter or a recovery vehicle is called. resentative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is If vehicle data needs to be transferred during complete. If necessary, you will be contacted an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, at a later time by another means, e.g. by e- this is initiated by the Customer Assistance mail or phone. center. You will see the Roadside Assis‐ tance Connected message in the COMAND Further functions of the vehicle remote mal- display. If the vehicle remote malfunction function diagnosis include, for example: diagnosis can be started, the Request for Rtransfer of service data to the Customer vehicle diagnosis received. Start Assistance center. If a service is overdue, vehicle diagnosis? message appears in the COMAND display shows a message the display. about various special offers at your workshop. Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes, Features 285

etc. If applicable, you will receive informa- Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance tion on special offers in the e-mail. Center then forwards this information to you. USA only: this information can also be You can select the way in which you receive called up under "Owners Online" at http:// this information beforehand. Possible options www.mbusa.com. include text message, e-mail or an automated Information on Roadside Assistance call. (Y page 25). The data you receive contains the following information: Downloading routes Rthe location where the speed limit was Downloading routes allows you to transfer exceeded and save predefined routes in the navigation Rthe time at which the speed limit was system. To do this, an SD memory card must exceeded be inserted into the COMAND system. If no Rthe selected speed limit which was excee- SD memory card is inserted, you must insert ded the card into the card slot on the COMAND system before saving. Geo fencing A route can be prepared and sent either by a Geo fencing allows you to select areas which customer service representative or via the the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will

mbrace portal on the Internet. Stowage and features be informed if the vehicle crosses the boun- Each route can include up to 20 way points. daries of the selected areas. You can select Once a route has been received by the navi- the way in which you receive this information gation system, you will see the has been saved to memory card. message, e-mail or an automated call. Do you want to start route guidance? The area can be determined as either a circle message in the COMAND display. The route is or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. saved to the SD memory card. You can specify up to ten areas simultane- X To start route guidance: select Yes. ously. Different settings are possible for each An overview of the route is shown in the area. display. USA only: these settings can be called up i If you select No, the saved route can be under "Owners Online" at http:// called up later via the navigation menu. www.mbusa.com. X Select Start. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call Route guidance is started. and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing. i Downloaded and saved data can be called Currently inactive areas can be activated by up again in COMAND. text message. You can find further information in the separate COMAND Operating Instructions. Triggering the vehicle alarm Speed alert With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm You can define the upper speed limit, which sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. must not be exceeded by the vehicle. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi- lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the cle, a message will be sent to the Customer alarm switches off.

Z 286 Features

Garage door opener Important safety notes General notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door The HomeLink® garage door opener integra- with the integrated garage door opener, per- ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper- sons in the range of movement of the garage ate up to three different door and gate sys- door can become trapped or struck by the tems. garage door. There is a risk of injury. Use the integrated garage door opener only When using the integrated garage door on garage doors that: opener, always make sure that nobody is Rhave safety stop and reverse features and within the range of movement of the garage Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards door. Once programed, the integrated garage door G opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the WARNING function of the garage door system's remote Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust control. Please also read the operating gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling instructions for the garage door system. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There When programing a garage door opener, park is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the the engine running in enclosed spaces with-

Stowage and features engine while programing. out sufficient ventilation. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you Programming have difficulty programing the integrated Programing buttons garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" Y Alternatively, you can call the following tele- ( page 286). phone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge) More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. A Notes on the declaration of conformity Garage door remote control is not inclu- (Y page 27). ded with the integrated garage door opener. X USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to control the garage door drive. Features 287

X To start programing mode: press and opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you hold one of buttons ; to ? on the inte- will need to use the programing button on the grated garage door opener. door drive control panel. The programing but- The garage door opener is now in program- ton may be positioned at different locations ing mode. After a short time, indicator depending on the manufacturer. It is usually lamp : lights up yellow. located on the door drive unit on the garage Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon ceiling. as button ;, = or ? is programed for the Familiarize yourself with the garage door first time. If the selected button has already drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro- been programed, indicator lamp : will graming of additional remote controls", only light up yellow after ten seconds have before carrying out the following steps. elapsed. Your vehicle must be within reach of the X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure lamp : flashes yellow. that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ X To program the remote control: point objects are present within the sweep of the garage door remote control A towards door or gate. buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm). tion lock (Y page 143). X Press and hold button B on remote control X Get out of the vehicle. Stowage and features A until indicator lamp : lights up green. X Press the programing button on the door When indicator lamp : lights up green: drive unit. programing is finished. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini- When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- tiate the next step. graming was successful. The next step is to X Get into the vehicle. synchronize the rolling code. X Press previously programed button ;, = X B A Release button on remote control for or ? on the integrated garage door opener the garage door drive system. until the door closes. : If indicator lamp lights up red: repeat the The rolling code synchronization is then programing procedure for the correspond- complete. ing button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote Notes on programing the remote control A control and the rear-view mirror. Canadian radio frequency laws require a The required distance between remote "break" (or interruption) of the transmission control A and the integrated garage door signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. opener depends on the garage door drive Therefore, these signals may not last long system. Several attempts might be neces- enough for the integrated garage door sary. You should test every position for at opener. The signal is not recognized during least 25 seconds before trying another programing. Comparable with Canadian law, position. some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Synchronizing the rolling code Proceed as follows: Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" R (Y page 286). if you live in Canada R If the garage door system uses a rolling code, if you have difficulties programing the you will also have to synchronize the garage garage door opener (regardless of where door system with the integrated garage door you live) when using the programing steps.

Z 288 Features

X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on operate in the frequency range of 280 to the integrated garage door opener. 433 MHz. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights RReplace the batteries in garage door up yellow. remote control A. This increases the like- X Release the button. lihood that garage door remote control A Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. will transmit a strong and precise signal to X Press button B of garage door remote the integrated garage door opener. control A for two seconds, then release it RWhen programing, hold remote control A for two seconds. at varying distances and angles from the X Press button B again for two seconds. button which you are programing. Try vari- X Repeat this sequence on button B of ous angles at a distance between 2and remote control A until indicator lamp : 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle lights up green. but at varying distances. When indicator lamp : lights up green: RIf another remote control is available for the programing is finished. same garage door drive, repeat the same When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- programing steps with this remote control. graming was successful. The next step is to Before performing these steps, make sure synchronize the rolling code. that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. X Release button B of remote control A of Stowage and features R the garage door drive. Note that some remote controls only trans- If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the mit for a limited amount of time (the indi- programing process for the corresponding cator lamp on the remote control goes out). B A button on the rear-view mirror. When doing Press button on remote control again so, vary the distance between remote con- before transmission ends. trol A and the rear-view mirror. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door The required distance between remote opener unit. This can improve signal recep- control A and the integrated garage door tion/transmission. opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be neces- Opening/closing the garage door sary. You should test every position for at After it has been programed, the integrated least 25 seconds before trying another garage door opener performs the function of position. the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions Problems when programing for the garage door system. If you are experiencing problems programing X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- the integrated garage door opener on the tion lock (Y page 143). rear-view mirror, take note of the following X instructions: Press button ;, = or ? which you have programed to operate the garage door. R Check the transmitter frequency used by Garage door system with a fixed code: indi- A garage door drive remote control and cator lamp : lights up green. whether it is supported. The transmitter Garage door system with a rolling code: frequency can usually be found on the back indicator lamp : flashes green. of the garage door drive remote control. The integrated garage door opener is com- The transmitter will transmit a signal as long patible with devices that have units which as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and Features 289 indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.

Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. North America zone map

Compass Stowage and features Calling up the compass The compass displays in which compass direction the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.

South America zone map X Push a round pen into opening = (Y page 289) for approximately three sec- To receive a correct display in rear-view mir- onds. ror :, the compass must be calibrated and The zone currently selected appears in the magnetic field zone set. compass display ; (Y page 289). X Setting the compass To select the zone: push a round pen into opening = (Y page 289) until the desired X Determine your position using the following zone is selected. zone maps. If, after a few seconds, the display in compass display ; (Y page 289) changes direction, the zone has been selected.

Z 290 Features

Calibrating the compass X Make sure that there is sufficient space for you to drive in a circle without impeding traffic. In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do the following: Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not in the vicinity of steel structures or high- voltage transmission lines. Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the climate control, windshield wipers or rear X Slide the seat backwards. window defroster. X To install: place the floormat in the foot- Rclose all doors and the tailgate. well. X Switch on the ignition. X Press safety catch knobs : onto retain- ; X Push a round pen into opening = ers . (Y page 289) for approximately six sec- X To remove: pull the floormat off retain- onds, until symbol C is shown in compass ers ;. display ; (Y page 289). X Remove the floormat. Stowage and features X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h). When the calibration has successfully been completed, the current direction is shown in compass display ; (Y page 289).

Floormat on the driver's side G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. 291

Useful information ...... 292 Engine compartment ...... 292 Maintenance ...... 296 Care ...... 297 Maintenance and care 292 Engine compartment

Useful information G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving i This Operator's Manual describes all components. Certain components, such as models and all standard and optional equip- the radiator fan, may continue to run or start ment of your vehicle available at the time of again suddenly when the ignition is off. There publication of the Operator's Manual. is a risk of injury. Country-specific differences are possible. If you need to do any work inside the engine Please note that your vehicle may not be compartment: equipped with all features described. This R also applies to safety-related systems and switch off the ignition functions. Rnever reach into the area where there is a i risk of danger from moving components, Read the information on qualified special- such as the fan rotation area ist workshops (Y page 28). Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- Engine compartment ple, away from moving parts

Hood G WARNING Important safety notes The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch G WARNING components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of Maintenance and care If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. injury. There is a risk of an accident. Never touch components of the ignition sys- Never unlatch the hood while driving. tem or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may Opening the hood suddenly fall into the closed position. There is G WARNING a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts Open and close the hood only when no one is of the exhaust system, can become very hot. within its range of movement. Working in the engine compartment poses a G WARNING risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and Opening the hood when the engine is over- touch only the components described in the heated or when there is a fire in the engine following. compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of G WARNING injury. When the hood is open and the windshield Let an overheated engine cool down before wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by opening the hood. If there is a fire in the the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. Engine compartment 293

! Make sure that the windshield wipers are X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A. not folded away from the windshield. You X Lift up support strut ? and insert it into could otherwise damage the windshield yellow retaining clip =. wipers or the hood. Closing the hood X Raise the hood slightly and, at the same time, remove support strut ? from yellow retaining clip =. X Swing support strut ? down and press it into bracket A until it engages. X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not X Make sure that the windshield wipers are properly engaged. Do not press the hood switched off. closed. Open the hood again and close it X Pull release lever : on the hood. with a little more force. The hood is released.

Engine oil

General notes Maintenance and care Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may X Reach into the gap between the hood and be in a different location. the radiator trim and press hood catch When checking the oil level: lever ; to the left. Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. X Raise the hood. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.

Z 294 Engine compartment

Checking the oil level using the oil dip- G WARNING stick If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- G WARNING ponents in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to of the exhaust system, can become very hot. the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and Working in the engine compartment poses a thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- risk of injury. ponents before starting the engine. Where possible, let the engine cool down and H Environmental note touch only the components described in the following. When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center. Maintenance and care Damage to the engine or exhaust system is Example caused by the following: X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have tube. not been specifically approved for the X Wipe off oil dipstick :. service system X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after tube to the stop, and take it out again. the interval for replacement specified by If the level is between MIN mark = and the service system has been exceeded MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. Rusing engine oil additives. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much oil. engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have Adding engine oil excess engine oil siphoned off.

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. Engine compartment 295

ture is above 104 ‡ (40 †) may result in damage to the engine or to the engine cooling system.

Example: engine oil cap X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. Example If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on X Park the vehicle on a level surface. the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn cooled down. clockwise. X Ensure that the cap locks into place Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- securely. tion lock (Y page 143).

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- X Check the coolant temperature display in Maintenance and care stick (Y page 294). the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below Further information on engine oil 104 ‡ (40 †). Y ( page 364). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 143) in the ignition lock. Checking and adding other service X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter- products clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. Checking coolant level X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and G WARNING remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = The engine cooling system is pressurized, par- in the filler neck when cold, there is enough ticularly when the engine is warm. When coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes- coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Let the engine cool down before opening the X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far cap. Wear eye and hand protection when as it will go. opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a turn to allow pressure to escape. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 365). ! The coolant may only be checked and corrected when the engine is cool (coolant temperature below 104 ‡ (40 †). Check- ing the coolant when the coolant tempera-

Z 296 Maintenance

Windshield washer system Maintenance G WARNING ASSYST PLUS Certain components in the engine compart- Service messages ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Working in the engine compartment poses a informs you of the next service due date. risk of injury. Information on the type of service and service Where possible, let the engine cool down and intervals (see the separate Maintenance touch only the components described in the Booklet). following. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at G WARNING http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if i it comes into contact with hot engine compo- The ASSYST PLUS service interval display nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of does not show any information on the fire and injury. engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 293). Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. Days R

Maintenance and care Service A Due RService A Exceeded by .. Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. Example You can obtain further information from an X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Add the premixed washer fluid. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck does not take into account any periods of until it engages. time during which the battery is disconnected. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message Maintaining the time-dependent service appears in the multifunction display prompt- schedule: ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 251). X Note down the service due date displayed Further information on windshield washer in the multifunction display before discon- fluid/antifreeze (Y page 366). necting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Care 297

Hiding a service message Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces X Press the a or % button on the steer- R ing wheel. if the engine is often left idling for long periods Displaying service messages Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter X Switch on the ignition. replaced or changed more frequently. Under X Press the = or ; button to select the arduous operating conditions, the tires must Serv. menu. be checked more often. Further information X Press the 9 or : button to select the can be obtained at a qualified specialist work- ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- pressing the a button. ter. The service due date appears in the multi- Driving abroad function display. An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can Information about Service obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- Care play has been inadvertently reset, this set-

ting can be corrected at a qualified special- General notes Maintenance and care ist workshop. H Environmental note Have service work carried out as described Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning in the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth- cloths in an environmentally responsible man- erwise lead to increased wear and damage ner. to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset of the following: the ASSYST PLUS service interval display Rdry, rough or hard cloths after the service work has been carried out. Rabrasive cleaning agents You can also obtain further information on R maintenance work, for example. solvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Special service requirements Do not scrub. The specified maintenance interval takes only Do not touch the surfaces or protective the normal operation of the vehicle into films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice account. Under arduous operating conditions scraper. You could otherwise scratch or or increased load on the vehicle, mainte- damage the surfaces and protective film. nance work must be carried out more frequently, for example: ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- after having cleaned the wheels with wheel ate stops R cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause if the vehicle is primarily used to travel increased corrosion of the brake discs and short distances brake pads/linings. For this reason, you

Z 298 Care

should drive for a few minutes after clean- Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the are fully closed. brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off vehicle can then be parked. (the OFF button has been pressed/the Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for airflow control is set to position 0). retaining the quality in the long term. Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position Use care products and cleaning agents rec- 0. ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car Exterior care wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before Automatic car wash cleaning it in an automatic car wash. G WARNING After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper Braking efficiency is reduced after washing blades. This will prevent smears and reduce the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. wiping noises caused by residue on the wind- After the vehicle has been washed, brake shield. carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored. Washing by hand

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function In some countries, washing by hand is only

Maintenance and care is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- allowed at wash bays that are specially cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- designed for this purpose. Observe the legal age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC requirements in all countries concerned. PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- X Do not use hot water and do not wash the ing or other similar situations: vehicle in direct sunlight. Rwhen towing the vehicle X Use a soft sponge to clean. Rin the car wash X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless X Automatic Car Wash as these use special Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can gentle jet of water. damage the paintwork or plastic parts. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. ! Make sure that the automatic transmis- X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sion is in position N when washing your sponge frequently. vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi- X cle could be damaged if the transmission is Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry in another position. thoroughly with a chamois. X ! Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the Make sure that: paintwork. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. Care 299

Power washers Cleaning the paintwork

G WARNING ! Do not affix: The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt Rstickers blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage Rfilms to the tires or chassis components. Compo- Rmagnetic plates or similar items nents damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, tires or chassis components replaced imme- while avoiding rubbing too hard. diately. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. ! Always maintain a distance of at least X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the off the treated areas afterwards. power washer nozzle. Information about X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, the correct distance is available from the oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently equipment manufacturer. with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or Move the power washer nozzle around lighter fluid. when cleaning your vehicle. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. Do not aim directly at any of the following: X Use silicone remover to remove wax. Rtires X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Maintenance and care Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to Relectrical components the paintwork quickly and provisionally. Rbattery The following cannot always be completely Rconnectors repaired: Rlights Rscratches Rseals Rcorrosive deposits Rtrim Rareas affected by corrosion Rventilation slots Rdamage caused by inadequate care Damaged seals or electrical components In such cases, visit a qualified specialist work- can lead to leaks or failures. shop. ! Edition 1 special model: parts of your If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. surface, use the paint care products recom- Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. (70 cm) between the foil-wrapped parts of This is the case approximately every three to the vehicle and the nozzle of the power five months, depending on the climate con- washer. ditions and the care product used. Information about the correct distance is If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface or available from the equipment manufac- if the paintwork has become dull, then the turer. paintwork should be cleaned. For cleaning, Move the power washer nozzle around please use the paint cleaner recommend and when cleaning your vehicle. approved by Mercedes Benz. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot.

Z 300 Care

Matte finish care Do not use power washers with circular jet ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged wheels. Polishing causes the finish to tires or chassis components replaced imme- shine. diately. ! The following may cause the paint to ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products become shiny and thus reduce the matte to remove brake dust. This could damage effect: wheel bolts and brake components. RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate- ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended rials. period straight after cleaning it, particularly RFrequent use of car washes. after having cleaned the wheels with wheel RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- brake pads/linings. For this reason, you ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. should drive for a few minutes after clean- wax. These products are only suitable for ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The with matte finish leads to considerable sur- vehicle can then be parked. face damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out Cleaning the windows at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING

Maintenance and care ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax You could become trapped by the windshield treatment under any circumstances. wipers if they start moving while cleaning the Observe these notes if your vehicle has a windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid injury. damage to the paintwork due to incorrect Always switch off the windshield wipers and treatment. the ignition before cleaning the windshield or These notes also apply to light alloy wheels wiper blades. with a clear matte finish. ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from i The vehicle should preferably be washed the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo you will damage the hood. and plenty of water. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, i Use only insect remover and car shampoo solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do care products. not touch the insides of the windows with Cleaning the wheels hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the G WARNING windows. The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt ! Clean the water drainage channels of the blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage windshield and the rear window at regular to the tires or chassis components. Compo- intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- and pollen may under certain circumstan- edly. There is a risk of an accident. ces prevent water from draining away. This Care 301

can lead to corrosion damage and damage X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior to electronic components. lighting using a wet sponge and a mild X Clean the inside and outside of the win- cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning shampoo or cleaning cloths. product that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning Cleaning wiper blades cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. G WARNING Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic You could become trapped by the windshield lenses of the mirror turn signals. wipers if they start moving while cleaning the X windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn injury. signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, Always switch off the windshield wipers and e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or clean- the ignition before cleaning the windshield or ing cloths. wiper blades.

! Only fold the windshield wipers away from Cleaning the sensors the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, ! If you clean the sensors with a power you will damage the hood. washer, make sure that you keep a dis-

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between Maintenance and care the wiper blade could be damaged. the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and available from the equipment manufac- do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the turer. graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or X Clean sensors : of the driving systems cleaning cloths could scratch or damage with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. the plastic light lenses.

Z 302 Care

Cleaning the rear view camera these components to cool down before touch- ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area ing them. around the rear view camera with a power Impurities combined with the effects of road washer. grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- based cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and AMG vehicles with black exhaust pipes: that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the do not use chrome polish to polish black ignition lock. chromed screens. They will otherwise lose their silky black shine. Rub the screen using X To open the cover of the rear view cam- a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. era: with the audio system/COMAND acti- Commercially available engine oils, WD 40 vated, press the W button. or Ballistol are suitable oils. Maintenance and care X Select System by turning cVd the audio system/COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Interior care X Select Rear view camera and press W to Cleaning the display confirm. X Select Open camera cover and press W ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- to confirm. lowing: The rear view camera cover opens. Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline X To clean the rear view camera: use clear Rabrasive cleaning agents water and a soft cloth to clean camera Rcommercially-available household clean- lens :. ing agents i The cover of the camera closes automat- These may damage the display surface. Do ically when the SmartKey is at position 0 in not put pressure on the display surface the ignition lock. when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara- ble damage to the display. Cleaning the exhaust pipe X Before cleaning the display, make sure that G WARNING it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commer- The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can cially available microfiber cloth and become very hot. If you come into contact TFT/LCD display cleaner. with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn X yourself. There is a risk of injury. Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow Care 303

Cleaning the plastic trim can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead G WARNING when cleaning the trim pieces. Care products and cleaning agents containing If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you become porous. As a result, plastic parts may are unsure as to whether the trim pieces come loose in the event of air bag deploy- are chrome-plated or not, consult an ment. There is a risk of injury. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not use any care products and cleaning X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with agents to clean the cockpit. a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa- cloth. ces: X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Rstickers Mercedes-Benz. Rfilms R scented oil bottles or similar items Cleaning the seat covers You can otherwise damage the plastic. General notes ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent ! or sunscreen to come into contact with the Do not use microfiber cloths to clean gen- plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA look of the surfaces. covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. Maintenance and care X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. i Note that regular care is essential to X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- ensure that the appearance and comfort of ucts recommended and approved by the covers is retained over time. Mercedes-Benz. Genuine leather seat covers The surface may change color temporarily. Leather is a natural product. Wait until the surface is dry again. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example: Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or R selector lever differences in the texture Rmarks caused by growth and injury X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use Rslight nuances of color leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- ments ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and

Z 304 Care

! To retain the natural appearance of the X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu- leather, observe the following cleaning tion. instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully Cleaning the headliner and carpets with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov- X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush ers down with a dry cloth. or a cleaning agent recommended and R Make sure that the leather does not approved by Mercedes-Benz. become soaked. It may otherwise X become rough and cracked. Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by ROnly use leather care agents that have Mercedes-Benz. been tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1%

Maintenance and care detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †) or in direct sunlight. 305

Useful information ...... 306 Where will I find...? ...... 306 Flat tire ...... 306 Battery (vehicle) ...... 311 Jump-starting ...... 315 Towing and tow-starting ...... 317 Fuses ...... 320 Breakdown assistance 306 Flat tire

Useful information Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified special- : Tire inflation compressor ist workshops (Y page 28). ; Towing eye = Tire sealant filler bottle Where will I find...? X Open the tailgate. Vehicle tool kit X Lift the cargo compartment floor up (Y page 272). General notes X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 308). Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is i Towing eye ; is located under tire infla- located in the stowage well under the cargo tion compressor :. compartment floor. Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire- Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit Breakdown assistance change tool kit is in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor. X Open the tailgate. X Lift the cargo compartment floor up i Apart from certain country-specific varia- (Y page 272). tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang- X Remove the tire-change tool kit. ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For The tire-change tool kit contains: more information on which tire changing RJack tools are required and approved to perform R a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a Lug wrench qualified specialist workshop. ROne pair of gloves Tools required for changing a wheel may RFolding wheel chock include, for example: R Jack Flat tire RWheel chock RLug wrench Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) (Y page 307) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 306) Flat tire 307

Information on changing/mounting a wheel sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking (Y page 348). next to the tire size designation, the load- X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and bearing capacity and the speed index level ground, as far away as possible from (Y page 342). traffic. MOExtended tires may only be used in con- X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. junction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure X Secure the vehicle against rolling away monitor. (Y page 159). If the pressure loss warning message X If possible, bring the front wheels into the appears in the multifunction display: straight-ahead position. R X Switch off the engine. Observe the instructions in the display messages (Y page 245). X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition R lock. Check the tire for damage. R X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. If driving on, observe the following notes. Make sure that they are not endangered as The maximum driving distance is approx- they do so. imately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is X Make sure that no one is near the danger partially laden and approximately 18 miles area while a wheel is being changed. Any- (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden. one who is not directly assisting in the In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- wheel change should, for example, stand tance possible depends upon: behind the barrier. RSpeed X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf- RRoad condition fic conditions when doing so. ROutside temperature X Close the driver's door. Breakdown assistance The driving distance possible in run-flat mode i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires may be reduced by extreme driving condi- are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the tions/maneuvers, or it can be increased factory. It is therefore recommended that through a moderate style of driving. you additionally equip your vehicle with a The maximum permissible distance which TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. the moment the tire pressure loss warning A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali- appears in the multifunction display. fied specialist workshop. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). i MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat When replacing one or all tires, make sure properties) that you use only tires: Rof the size specified for the vehicle and General notes Rmarked "MOExtended" With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat If a tire has gone flat and cannot be characteristics), you can continue to drive replaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand- your vehicle even if there is a total loss of ard tire may be used as a temporary meas- pressure in one or more tires. The affected ure. Make sure that you use the proper size tire must not show any clearly visible damage. and type (summer or winter tire). You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the 308 Flat tire

i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires G WARNING are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the In the following situations, the tire sealant is factory. It is therefore recommended that unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis- you additionally equip your vehicle with a tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not R feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. there are cuts or punctures in the tire larger A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali- than those mentioned above. fied specialist workshop. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or Important safety notes on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified When driving in emergency mode, the driving specialist workshop. characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. G WARNING There is a risk of an accident. The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. tion. It must not come into contact with your Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away off-road). This applies in particular to a laden from children. There is a risk of injury. vehicle. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, Stop driving in emergency mode if: observe the following: Ryou hear banging noises. RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin R the vehicle starts to shake. immediately with water. Breakdown assistance R you see smoke and smell rubber. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with RESP® is intervening constantly. your eyes, immediately rinse them thor- Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. oughly with clean water. After driving in emergency mode, have the RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink workshop with regard to their further use. The plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, defective tire must be replaced in every case. and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. TIREFIT kit RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. Important safety notes ! TIREFIT is a tire sealant. Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to without a break. It may otherwise overheat. 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem- The tire inflation compressor can be oper- peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). ated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Flat tire 309

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty TIREFIT sticker, 2-part tire. X D C X Do not remove any foreign objects which Screw filler hose onto valve . have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or X Insert connector ? into the cigarette nails. lighter socket (Y page 276) or into a 12 V Y X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom- socket in your vehicle ( page 276). panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla- X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition compressor from the stowage well tion lock (Y page 143). underneath the cargo compartment floor X Press on/off switch = on the tire inflation (Y page 306). compressor to I. X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within The tire inflation compressor is switched the driver's field of vision. on. The tire is inflated. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. Breakdown assistance valve on the wheel with the defective tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase. X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (Y page 310). If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out has not been attained after five minutes, see of the housing. "Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 310). X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire seal- i ant bottle :. If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It X Place tire sealant bottle : head down- can then be removed like a layer of film. wards into recess ; of the tire inflation If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, compressor. have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Z 310 Flat tire

Tire pressure not reached H Environmental note If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of not been attained after five minutes: professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) the faulty tire. has been attained after five minutes: X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of X Pump up the tire again. the faulty tire. After a maximum of five minutes the tire X pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire 26 psi). inflation compressor. X Pull away immediately. G WARNING X Stop after driving for approximately ten If the required tire pressure is not reached minutes and check the tire pressure with after the specified time, the tire is too badly the tire inflation compressor. damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the The tire pressure must now be at least tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- G WARNING acteristics. There is a risk of accident. If the required tire pressure is not reached Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified after driving for a short period, the tire is too specialist workshop. badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair

Breakdown assistance the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a Tire pressure reached tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- G WARNING acteristics. There is a risk of accident. A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified impairs the driving characteristics and is not specialist workshop. suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. i In cases such as the one mentioned You should therefore adapt your driving style above, contact an authorized Mercedes- accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes the specified maximum speed with a tire that (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can- has been repaired using tire sealant. ada). X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part Loading Information placard on the driver's of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the side B-pillaror the tire pressure table in the instrument cluster in the driver's field of fuel filler flap for values. vision. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on ! After use, excess tire sealant may run out the tire inflation compressor. of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. Battery (vehicle) 311

G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: X To reduce the tire pressure: depress Rbraking pressure release button E next to pres- Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver sure gauge F. and/or when the vehicle's speed is not

adapted to the road conditions ce X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed There is a risk of an accident. tan tire. In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop the sealed tire. immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery car- X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. wn assis inflation compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire For further information about ABS and ESP®, sealant bottle. see (Y page 65) and (Y page 68).

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire G WARNING Breakdo inflation compressor. Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- workshop and have the tire changed there. sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as explosion. soon as possible at a qualified specialist Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle workshop. body to remove any existing electrostatic X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every build-up. four years at a qualified specialist workshop. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump- starting. Battery (vehicle) Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build- Important safety notes up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for Special tools and expert knowledge are example: required when working on the battery, e.g. Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic removal and installation. You should there- fibers fore have all work involving the battery car- Rdue to friction between clothing and seats ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth

Z 312 Battery (vehicle)

G WARNING ! Have the battery checked regularly at a During the charging process, a battery produ- qualified specialist workshop. ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or Observe the service intervals in the Main- sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe- ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. cialist workshop for more information. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a ! You should have all work involving the connected battery does not come into con- battery carried out at a qualified specialist tact with vehicle parts. workshop. In the exceptional case that it is RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat- necessary for you to disconnect the battery tery. yourself, make sure that: RIt is important that you observe the descri- Ryou switch off the engine and remove the bed order of the battery terminals when SmartKey. Check that all the indicator connecting and disconnecting a battery. lamps in the instrument cluster are off. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the Otherwise, electronic components, such battery poles with identical polarity are as the alternator, may be damaged. connected. Ryou first remove the negative terminal RIt is particularly important to observe the clamp and then the positive terminal described order when connecting and dis- clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. connecting the jumper cables. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys- RNever connect or disconnect the battery tem may be damaged. terminals while the engine is running. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is locked in position P G WARNING after disconnecting the battery. The vehi-

Breakdown assistance Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. cle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean The battery and the cover of the positive over the battery. Keep children away from terminal clamp must be installed securely batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with during operation. water and seek medical attention. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. H Environmental note Risk of explosion. Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They Fire, open flames and smoking are must be collected separately prohibited when handling the bat- and recycled to protect the tery. Avoid creating sparks. environment. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- Dispose of batteries in an tact with skin, eyes or clothing. environmentally friendly Wear suitable protective clothing, manner. Take discharged especially gloves, apron and face- batteries to a qualified spe- guard. cialist workshop or a special Rinse any acid spills immediately collection point for used bat- with clear water. Contact a physi- teries. cian if necessary. Battery (vehicle) 313

Wear eye protection. i If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will have to: Keep children away. Rset the clock (audio system/COMAND, see the separate operating instructions). Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding Observe this Operator's Manual. the mirrors out once (Y page 104).

Charging the battery For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have G WARNING been tested and approved for your vehicle by During charging and jump-starting, explosive Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide gases can escape from the battery. There is a increased impact protection to prevent vehi- risk of an explosion. cle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating an accident. sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- Do not lean over a battery. mum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. G WARNING Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. discharge over time if you do not use the Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

vehicle. In this case, have the battery discon- Breakdown assistance nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean can also charge the battery with a charger over the battery. Keep children away from recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with qualified specialist workshop for further infor- water and seek medical attention. mation. G WARNING Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- for short trips or if you leave it standing idle tures below freezing point. When jump-start- for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe- ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases cialist workshop if you wish to leave your can escape from the battery. There is a risk of vehicle parked for a long period of time. an explosion. Only replace a battery with a battery that has Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before been recommended by Mercedes-Benz. charging it or jump-starting. i Remove the SmartKey if you park the ! Only use battery chargers with a maxi- vehicle and do not require any electrical mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. consumers. The vehicle will then use very ! Only charge the battery using the jump- little energy, thus conserving battery starting connection point. power. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 315).

Z 314 Battery (vehicle)

X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 315). If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/ warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized

Breakdown assistance Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Jump-starting 315

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting Breakdown assistance and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 316 Jump-starting

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables are connected to the battery. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. Breakdown assistance X Open the hood. Towing and tow-starting 317

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump- starting device. X Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting G WARNING If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow- Important safety notes Breakdown assistance started is greater than the permissible gross G WARNING weight of your vehicle: Functions relevant to safety are restricted or Rthe towing eye could detach itself no longer available if: Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- Rthe engine is not running. over. Rthe brake system or the power steering is There is a risk of an accident. malfunctioning. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply its weight should not be greater than the per- or the vehicle's electrical system. missible gross weight of your vehicle. If your vehicle is being towed, much more Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle force may be necessary to steer or brake. weight rating can be found on the vehicle There is a risk of an accident. identification plate (Y page 360). In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 318 Towing and tow-starting

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST The battery must be connected and charged. PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- Otherwise, you: tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto- Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in matically in certain situations. To avoid the ignition lock damage to the vehicle, deactivate these Rcannot release the electric parking brake systems in the following or similar situa- R tions: cannot shift the transmission to position N Rwhen towing the vehicle i The function of the electric parking brake Rin the car wash and the parking lock is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the low or there is a malfunction in the system, towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could it may not be possible to apply the released be damaged. parking brake or shift the transmission to ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery position P. purposes as this could damage the vehicle. i Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. the radio. ! When towing, pull away slowly and i Disarm the automatic locking feature smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, before the vehicle is towed (Y page 217). the vehicles could be damaged. You could otherwise be locked out when ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of pushing or towing the vehicle. 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded. Installing/removing the towing eye If the vehicle has to be towed more than Breakdown assistance 30 miles (50km), the front axle must be Installing the towing eye raised or the entire vehicle raised and transported. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. If the vehicle can no longer be driven because of an accident or breakdown, you have the following options: Rtransporting the vehicle As a rule, you should have the vehicle transported. Rtowing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar Example: towing eye mounting covers X Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases. Remove the towing eye from the stowage space. When towing a vehicle, the transmission must be in position N. Towing and tow-starting 319

The towing eye is beneath the cargo com- The automatic transmission automatically partment floor with the vehicle tool kit shifts to position P when you open the driver's (Y page 306). or front-passenger door or when you remove Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order eye is beneath the tire inflation compres- to ensure that the automatic transmission sor. stays in position N when towing the vehicle, X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the you must observe the following points: direction of the arrow. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Take cover : off the opening. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clock- tion lock. wise to the stop. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- Removing the towing eye tion N. X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the X To fasten the front cover: position the top ignition lock. of cover : in the bumper and press it in at X Release the brake pedal. the bottom until it engages. X Release the electric parking brake. X To fasten the rear cover: position the left- X Switch on the hazard warning lamps hand side of cover : in the bumper and (Y page 113). press it in on the right-hand side until it It is important that you observe the safety engages. instructions when towing away your vehicle X Place the towing eye in the stowage well (Y page 317). beneath the cargo compartment floor Breakdown assistance (Y page 306) in the cargo compartment. X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the Towing the vehicle with the front axle tire inflation compressor. raised Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the front axle raised. Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, i In order to signal a change of direction as doing so will damage the transmission. when towing with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps away with both axles on the ground or be loa- for the direction of travel flash. After reset- ded up and transported. ting the combination switch, the hazard ! The ignition must be switched off if the warning lamp starts flashing again. vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and damage the brake system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

Z 320 Fuses

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- Vehicles with 4MATIC may only either be tion P. towed away with both axles on the ground or X Release the brake pedal. be loaded up and transported. X Release the electric parking brake. If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear X Switch off the automatic locking axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported (Y page 217). on a truck or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical X Switch on the hazard warning lamps system (Y page 113). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To tion lock and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's Observe the important safety notes when electrical system in the same way as when towing your vehicle with the front axle raised jump-starting (Y page 315). (Y page 317). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Transporting the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the Tow-starting (emergency engine wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as starting) axle or steering components. Otherwise, ! Vehicles with automatic transmission the vehicle could be damaged. must not be tow-started. You could other- The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle wise damage the automatic transmission. onto a trailer or transporter for transporting Breakdown assistance i purposes. You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 315). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the transmission to position N. Fuses X Release the electric parking brake. Important safety notes As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: G WARNING X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if applying the electric parking brake. you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- X Shift the transmission to position P. age, the electric cables could be overloaded. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an tion lock and remove it. accident and injury. X Secure the vehicle. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed have the correct fuse rating for the system with either the front or the rear axle raised, concerned. Only use fuses marked with an as doing so will damage the transmission. "S". Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. Fuses 321

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- the operation of the fuses. nents on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Open the hood. Before changing a fuse X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture X Secure the vehicle against rolling away from the fuse box. (Y page 159). X To open: open clamps ;. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Fold up cover : in the direction of the X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- arrow and remove it. tion lock and remove it (Y page 143). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box in the engine compartment on the Breakdown assistance left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the front-passenger footwell (Y page 322). X To close: check whether the seal is seated correctly in cover :. Fuse box in the engine compartment X Insert cover : at the back into openings G WARNING = on the fuse box. X When the hood is open and the windshield Fold down cover :. wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. close. Always switch off the windshield wipers and X Close the hood. the ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture

Z 322 Fuses

Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell

X To open: remove the floormat from the front-passenger side. X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the direction of the arrow. Breakdown assistance

X To release cover =, press retaining clamp ;. X Fold out cover = in the direction of the arrow to the catch. X Remove cover = forwards. i Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the lower right-hand side of cover =. X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand side of the fuse box into the retainer. Cover = engages in the retainers. X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock audibly. X Fold back perforated floor covering :. 323

Useful information ...... 324 Important safety notes ...... 324 Operation ...... 324 Winter operation ...... 326 Tire pressure ...... 328 Loading the vehicle ...... 335 Maximum load rating ...... 339 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...... 340 Tire labeling ...... 341 Definition of terms for tires and loading ...... 345 Changing a wheel ...... 347 Wheel and tire combinations ...... 352 Wheels and tires 324 Operation

Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics: R i pay attention to the information and warn- This Operator's Manual describes all ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with models and all standard and optional equip- run-flat characteristics). ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Accessories that are not approved for your Country-specific differences are possible. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not Please note that your vehicle may not be being used correctly can impair operating equipped with all features described. This safety. also applies to safety-related systems and Before purchasing and using non-approved functions. accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- i Read the information on qualified special- shop and inquire about: ist workshops (Y page 28). Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations R Important safety notes factory recommendations Information on dimensions and types of G WARNING wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found (Y page 352). If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, Information on air pressure for the tires on the wheel brakes or suspension components your vehicle can be found: may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- Always replace wheels and tires with those tion placard on the B-pillar that fulfill the specifications of the original Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler part. flap (Y page 158) When replacing wheels, make sure to use the Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 328) Wheels and tires correct: i Further information on wheels and tires Rdesignation can be obtained at any qualified specialist Rmodel workshop. When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Operation Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Information on driving Rmodel RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire pressures and correct them if neces- G WARNING sary. A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. noises and unusual handling characteris- There is a risk of accident. tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi- Tires without run-flat characteristics: cate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, Rdo not drive with a flat tire. reduce your speed immediately. Stop the R immediately replace the flat tire with your vehicle as soon as possible to check the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire consult a qualified specialist workshop. damage could also be causing the unusual Operation 325

handling characteristics. If you find no Regularly check the pressure of all the tires signs of damage, have the wheels and tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire checked at a qualified specialist workshop. pressure as necessary (Y page 328). RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that The service life of tires depends, among other the tires do not get deformed by the curb or things, on the following factors: other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive RDriving style over curbs, speed humps or similar eleva- RTire pressure tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse R angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the Distance covered sidewalls, may be damaged. Important safety notes on the tire Regular checking of wheels and tires tread G WARNING G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where Check the tires regularly for signs of damage speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- and replace any damaged tires immediately. ditions. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the wheels and tires of your If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires vehicle for damage at least once a month, as may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- well as after driving off-road or on rough ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of should regularly check the tread depth and tire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam- the condition of the tread across the entire age such as: width of all tires.

Rcuts in the tires Minimum tire tread depth for: Wheels and tires Rpunctures RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) Rtears in the tires RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm) Rbulges on tires For safety reasons, replace the tires before Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 325). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread.

Z 326 Winter operation

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by factory. It is therefore recommended that law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire you additionally equip your vehicle with a tread. They are visible once the tread depth is TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. case, the tire is so worn that it must be A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali- replaced. fied specialist workshop.

Selecting, mounting and replacing Winter operation tires General notes ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" Y tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires section ( page 348). with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 307). Driving with summer tires ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), summer RAfter mounting new tires, break them in at tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and moderate speeds for the first 60 miles braking power. Change the tires on your vehi- (100 km), as they only reach their full per- cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very formance after this distance. cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires perma- RDo not drive with tires which have too little nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept tread depth, as this significantly reduces responsibility for this type of damage. the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).

Wheels and tires RReplace the tires after six years at the lat- G WARNING est, regardless of wear. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat Check the tires regularly for signs of damage properties) and replace any damaged tires immediately. With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of M+S tires pressure in one or more tires. G WARNING MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã warning system or with an active tire pressure in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter monitor and on wheels specifically tested by and do not provide sufficient traction. There is Mercedes-Benz. a risk of an accident. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in a flat tire (Y page 307). (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the Winter operation 327

At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use win- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire mends that you only use snow chains that are identified by the M+S marking. have been specially approved for your vehicle Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro- standard of quality. vide the best possible grip in wintry road con- If you intend to mount snow chains, please ditions. Only these tires will allow driving bear the following points in mind: ® safety systems such as ABS and ESP to RSnow chains may not be mounted on all function optimally in winter. These tires have wheel/tire combinations. Permissible been developed specifically for driving in wheel-tire combinations (Y page 352). snow. ROnly use snow chains when driving on Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on roads completely covered by snow. all wheels to maintain safe handling charac- Remove the snow chains as soon as possi- teristics. ble when you come to a road that is not Always observe the maximum permissible snow-covered. speed specified for the M+S tires you have RLocal regulations may restrict the use of mounted. snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg- Once the winter tires are mounted: ulations if you wish to mount snow chains. X Check the tire pressures (Y page 331). RDo not exceed the maximum permissible X Restart the tire pressure loss warning sys- speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). R tem3 (Y page 331) or restart the tire pres- When snow chains are installed, never use Y sure monitor4 (Y page 334). Active Parking Assist ( page 189). i You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 69) when pulling away with snow Snow chains chains installed. You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach- G WARNING Wheels and tires ieving an increased driving force (cutting If snow chains are mounted on the rear action). wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion to the vehicle body or to chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever mount snow chains on the rear wheels Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the front wheels.

! On some tire sizes there is not enough space for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire combinations" section under "Tires and wheels".

3 Canada 4 USA, Canada

Z 328 Tire pressure

Tire pressure Tire pressure specifications G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire : traction. Recommended tire pressures Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer- Option 2) Tire pressure table on the inside of ing and braking, may be greatly impaired. the fuel filler flap. There is a risk of an accident. The tire pressure table contains the recom- Follow recommended tire inflation pressures mended pressures for cold tires for various and check the pressure of all the tires includ- operating conditions, i.e. differing load and ing the spare wheel: speed conditions. Rmonthly, at least i Specifications shown in the examples of Rif the load changes tire pressure tables are for illustration pur- Rbefore beginning a long journey poses only. Tire pressure specifications are R vehicle-specific and may deviate from the under different operating conditions, e.g. data shown here. Tire pressure specifica- off-road driving tions applicable to your vehicle are located If necessary, correct the tire pressure. in your vehicle's tire pressure table. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the Wheels and tires tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. 1.) Tire and Loading Information placard Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehi- for this vehicle by the factory cle (Y page 335). If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire The Tire and Loading Information placard con- pressure information following is only valid tains the recommended tire pressures for for that tire size. The load conditions "partially cold tires. The recommended tire pressures laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the are valid for the maximum permissible load table for different numbers of occupants and and up to the maximum permissible vehicle amounts of luggage. The actual number of speed. seats may differ. Tire pressure 329

Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. G WARNING R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire (Y page 342). valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire Wheels and tires does not permit any reliable conclusion about If the tire pressures have been set to the the tire pressure. lower values for lighter loads and/or lower The tire temperature and pressure increase road speeds, the pressures should be reset to when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend- the higher values: ent on the driving speed and the load. R if you want to drive with an increased load Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- and/or sures when the tires are cold. R if you want to drive at higher road speeds The tires are cold: i The tire pressures for increased loads Rif the vehicle has been parked without and/or higher road speeds, shown in the direct sunlight on the tires for at least three tire pressure table, may have a negative hours and effect on driving comfort. Rif the vehicle has not been driven further If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this than 1 mile (1.6 km) can lead to an excessive build up of heat and The tire temperature changes depending on a sudden loss of pressure. the outside temperature, the vehicle speed For more information, contact a qualified spe- and the tire load. If the tire temperature cialist workshop. changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ 1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-

Z 330 Tire pressure

ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correct driving characteristics. There is a risk of an the tire pressure if it is too low for the current accident. operating conditions. If you check the tire Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the pressure when the tires are warm, the result- tires, including the spare wheel. ing value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire Overinflated tires may: pressure to the value specified for cold tires. Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac- The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. teristics Observe the recommended tire pressures for Rwear quickly and unevenly cold tires: Rbe more susceptible to damage Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rincrease the braking distance Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Maximum tire pressures Never exceed the maximum permissible tire Underinflated or overinflated tires inflation pressure. Always observe the rec- Underinflation ommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure G WARNING (Y page 328). Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.

Wheels and tires Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may: R wear quickly and unevenly : Example: maximum permissible tire pres- Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption sure Roverheat, leading to tire defects i The actual values for tires are vehicle- R have an adverse effect on handling charac- specific and may deviate from the values in teristics the illustration. Overinflation

G WARNING Checking the tire pressures Tires with excessively high pressure can burst Important safety notes because they are damaged more easily by Observe the "Tire pressure information" sec- road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they tion (Y page 328). also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the Tire pressure 331

Information on air pressure for the tires on You can recognize the tire pressure loss warn- your vehicle can be found: ing in the multifunction display in the Serv. Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- menu, by the Run Flat Indicator Active tion placard on the B-pillar Press 'OK' to Restart message. Further information on the message display can be Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler found under "Restarting the tire pressure loss flap warning system" (Y page 331). Rin the "Tire pressure information" section Important safety notes Checking tire pressures manually The tire pressure warning system does not To determine and set the correct tire pres- warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. sure, proceed as follows: Observe the notes on the recommended tire X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to pressure (Y page 328). be checked. The tire pressure loss warning does not X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto replace the need to regularly check the tire the valve. pressure. An even loss of pressure on several X Read the tire pressure and compare it with tires at the same time cannot be detected by the recommended value on the Tire and the tire pressure loss warning system. Loading Information placard on the B-pillar The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn on the driver's side of your vehicle. you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the X If necessary, increase the tire pressure to tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the the recommended value (Y page 328). event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by abrupt steering maneuvers. pressing down the metal pin in the valve using the tip of a pen, for example. Then, The function of the tire pressure loss warning check the tire pressure again using the tire system is limited or delayed if: pressure gauge. Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's Wheels and tires X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. tires. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor- Tire pressure loss warning system nering at high speeds or driving with high (Canada only) rates of acceleration). General notes Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- tire pressure using the rotational speed of the ing system wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed Restart the tire pressure loss warning system of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a if you have: loss of pressure, a corresponding warning Rchanged the tire pressure message will appear in the multifunction dis- Rchanged the wheels or tires play. Rmounted new wheels or tires

Z 332 Tire pressure

X Before restarting, make sure that the tire X When the Tire Pressure Now OK? mes- pressures are set properly on all four tires sage appears, press the 9 or : but- for the respective operating conditions. ton to select Cancel. The recommended tire pressure can be X Press the a button. found on the Tire and Loading Information The tire pressure values stored at the last placard on the B-pillaron the driver's side. restart will continue to be monitored. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reli- Tire pressure monitor able warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is General notes set, these incorrect values will be moni- If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi- tored. cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the X Observe the notes in the section on tire tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres- pressures (Y page 328). sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). monitor only functions if the correct sensors are installed on all wheels. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes X Press the 9 or : button to select of driving, the current tire pressure of each Tire Pressure. tire is shown in the Serv. menu of the multi- X Press the a button. function display. The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: Wheels and tires X Press the a button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Example: current tire pressure display Yes. For information on the message display, refer X Press the a button. to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni- Y The Run Flat Indicator Restarted cally" section ( page 334). message appears in the multifunction display. Important safety notes After a teach-in period, the tire pressure G WARNING loss warning system will monitor the set Each tire, including the spare (if provided), tire pressures of all four tires. should be checked at least once every two If you wish to cancel the restart: weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure X Press the % button. recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard or on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than Tire pressure 333 the size indicated on the Tire and Loading It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires pressure label, you should determine the which is suitable for the operating situation proper tire pressure for those tires. (Y page 328). Note that the correct tire pres- As an added safety feature, your vehicle has sure for the current operating situation must been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the sure telltale when one or more of your tires warning threshold for the warning message is are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, aligned to the reference values taught-in. when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust- you should stop and check your tires as soon ing the pressure of the cold tires Y as possible, and inflate them to the proper ( page 334). The current pressures are pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- saved as new reference values. As a result, a flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can warning message will appear if the tire pres- lead to tire failure. sure drops significantly. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency The tire pressure monitor does not warn you and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe handling and stopping ability. Please note that the notes on the recommended tire pressure Y the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire ( page 328). maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the underinflation has not reached the level to tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the sure telltale. vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid Your vehicle has also been equipped with a abrupt steering maneuvers. TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn- the system is not operating properly. The ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat- Wheels and tires TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi- tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp cates whether a tire pressure is too low or the will flash for approximately a minute and then tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: remain continuously illuminated. This Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the sequence will be repeated every time the vehi- tire pressure on one or more tires is signif- cle is started as long as the malfunction icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu- not malfunctioning. minated, the system may not be able to detect Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a or signal low tire pressure as intended. minute and then remains lit constantly, the TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. reasons, including the installation of incom- i patible replacement or alternate tires or In addition to the warning lamp, a mes- wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS sage appears in the multifunction display. from functioning properly. Always check the Further information can be found on TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one (Y page 245). or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires it may take more than ten minutes for the tire and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to pressure warning lamp to inform you of the function properly. malfunction by flashing for approximately one

Z 334 Tire pressure

minute and then remaining lit. When the mal- Tire pressure monitor warning mes- function has been rectified, the tire pressure sages warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure driving. loss in one or more tires, a warning message The tire pressure values indicated by the on- is shown in the multifunction display and the board computer may differ from those meas- yellow tire pressure monitor warning light ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. comes on. The tire pressures shown by the on-board R computer refer to those measured at sea If the Correct Tire Pressure message level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val- appears in the multifunction display, the ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higher tire pressure in at least one tire is too low than those shown by the on-board computer. and must be corrected at the next oppor- In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. tunity. R The operation of the tire pressure monitor can If the Check Tire Pressure Soon mes- be affected by interference from radio trans- sage appears in the multifunction display, mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, the tire pressure in one or more tires has two-way radios) that may be being operated dropped significantly and the tires must be in or near the vehicle. checked. RIf the Tire Pressure Warning Tire Checking the tire pressure electroni- Failure message appears in the multi- cally function display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly and the X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position tires must be checked. 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 143). Observe the instructions and safety notes in X Press the = or ; button on the steer- the display messages in the "Tires" section ing wheel to select the Serv. menu. (Y page 245). X Press the 9 or : button to select i

Wheels and tires If the wheel positions on the vehicle are Tire Pressure. rotated, the tire pressures may be dis- X a Press the button. played for the wrong positions for a short The current tire pressure of each tire is time. This is rectified after a few minutes of shown in the multifunction display. driving, and the tire pressures are displayed If the vehicle was parked for longer than for the correct positions. 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few Restarting the tire pressure monitor minutes message is shown. When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all After a teach-in process, the tire pressure existing warning messages are deleted and monitor automatically detects new wheels or the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the currently set tire pressures as the refer- the tire pressure value to the individual ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the Tire Pressure wheels is not possible, the tire pressure monitor will automatically Monitor Active message is shown instead detect the new reference values after you of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures have changed the tire pressure. However, you are already being monitored. can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. Loading the vehicle 335

X Set the tire pressure to the value recom- Radio type approval for the tire pres- mended for the corresponding driving sit- sure monitor uation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side Country Radio type approval number B-pillar (Y page 328). USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A Additional tire pressure values for different FCC ID: MRXGG4 loads can also be found on the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4 (Y page 328). Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct IC: 2546A-GG4 on all four wheels. IC: 2546A-MC34MA4 X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Loading the vehicle ing wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Instruction labels for tires and loads Tire Pressure. G WARNING X Press the a button. Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a The multifunction display shows the cur- blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the rent tire pressure for each tire or the Tire steering and driving characteristics and lead pressure will be displayed after to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. driving a few minutes message. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load X Press the : button. rating must be at least half of the GAWR of The multifunction display shows the Use your vehicle. Never overload the tires by current pressures as new reference exceeding the maximum load. values message. Wheels and tires If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. : B-pillar, driver's side If you wish to cancel the restart: Two instruction labels on your vehicle show X % Press the button. the maximum possible load. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details

Z 336 Loading the vehicle

of the tire sizes and corresponding pres- mum permissible load that applies for your sures for tires mounted at the factory. vehicle can be found on your vehicle's Tire (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the and Loading Information placard. B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up Number of seats of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to Maximum permissible gross vehicle travel in the vehicle. This information can be weight rating found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the

Wheels and tires details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load- ing Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit X Specification for maximum gross vehicle Step-by-step instructions weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight The following steps have been developed as of occupants and cargo should never required of all manufacturers under Title 49, exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". applicable) must not exceed the specified X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com- value. bined weight of occupants and cargo i The specifications shown on the Tire and should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible load is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The maxi- Loading the vehicle 337

your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 Ò 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capa-

city calculated in step 4. tires X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Refer to this Operator's Manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle Wheels and (Y page 339).

Z 338 Loading the vehicle

Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard (Y page 336). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Step 1 Combined maximum 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs weight of occupants (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg) and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Step 2 Number of people in 5 3 1 the vehicle (driver and occupants) Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1 occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2 Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1: pants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: Occupant 2: Wheels and tires 180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) occupants Maximum load rating 339

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Step 3 Permissible load and 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs trailer load/nose- (680 kg) Ò (680 kg) Ò (680 kg) Ò weight (maximum 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) = permissible load rat- = 750 lbs =960 lbs 1350 lbs ing from the Tire and (340 kg) (435 kg) (612 kg) Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

Vehicle identification plate Maximum load rating Even if you have calculated the total cargo Do not overload the tires by exceeding the carefully, you should still make sure that the specified load limit. The maximum permissi- gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and weight rating are not exceeded. Details can Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on be found on the vehicle identification plate on the driver's side (Y page 335). the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 335). Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the Wheels and tires maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehi- Maximum tire load : is the maximum per- cle weight and maximum gross axle weight missible weight for which the tire is approved. rating), have your loaded vehicle (including i driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if The actual values for tires are vehicle- applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle specific and may deviate from the values in weighbridge. the illustration.

Trailer load/noseweight The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the trailer load/noseweight is included in the load along with occupants and luggage. The trailer load/noseweight is usually between 10%and 15% of the gross weight of the trailer and its load.

Z 340 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- under controlled conditions on a specified ards U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half Overview of Tire Quality Grading times as well on the government course as a Standards tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm, due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions.

Traction G WARNING Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are The traction grade assigned to this tire is U.S. government specifications. Their pur- based on straight-ahead braking traction pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia- tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- ble information on tire performance data. Tire nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- manufacturers have to grade tires using three acteristics. performance factors: tread wear :, tire trac- The traction grades, from highest to lowest, tion ;, and heat resistance =. These regu- are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent lations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as all tires sold in North America are provided measured under controlled conditions on with the corresponding quality grading mark- specified government test surfaces of asphalt ings on the sidewall of the tire. and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor Wheels and tires All passenger car tires must conform to the traction performance. statutory safety requirements in addition to The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy these grades. road is always lower than on dry road surfa- Where applicable, the tire grading informa- ces. tion can be found on the tire sidewall between You should pay special attention to road con- the tread shoulder and maximum tire width. ditions when temperatures are around the i The actual values for tires are vehicle- freezing point. specific and may deviate from the values in Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum the illustration. tread depth of ã in (4 mm) for all four winter For example: tires (Y page 326) to maintain normal driving characteristics in winter. Winter tires can Treadwear Traction Temperature reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. 200 AA A Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with ice or snow. Take appropriate care Treadwear when driving. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage based on the wear rate of the tire when tested to the drive train. Tire labeling 341

Temperature Tire labeling G WARNING Overview of tire labeling The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. These represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance The following markings are on the tire in addition to which all passenger car tires must meet under the tire name (sales designation) and the manu- the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard facturer's name: No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher : Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard levels of performance on the laboratory test (Y page 345) wheel than the minimum required by law. ; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 344) = Maximum tire load (Y page 339)

? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 330) Wheels and tires A Manufacturer B Tire material (Y page 345) C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed index (Y page 342) D Load index (Y page 344) E Tire name i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Z 342 Tire labeling

Tire size designation, load-bearing ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by capacity and speed rating the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in : Tire width inches (in). ; Nominal aspect ratio in % Load bearing index: load bearing index A is = Tire code a numerical code which specifies the maxi- ? Rim diameter mum load-bearing capacity of a tire. A Load bearing index Do not overload the tires by exceeding the B Speed rating specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on ate from the data in the example. the driver's side (Y page 335). General: depending on the manufacturer's Example: standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall A load-bearing index of 91 indicates a maxi- may not contain any letters or may contain mum load of 1,356lb (615kg) that can be car- one letter that precedes the size description. ried by the tires. For further information on Wheels and tires If there is no letter preceding the size descrip- the maximum tire load in kilograms and tion (as shown above): these are passenger pounds, see (Y page 339). vehicle tires according to European manufac- For further information on the load-bearing turing standards. index, see Load index (Y page 344). If "P" precedes the size description: these are Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. approved maximum speed of the tire. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these G WARNING are light truck tires according to U.S. manu- Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- facturing standards. city and the approved maximum speed could If "T" precedes the size description: these are lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There compact emergency spare wheels at high tire is a risk of accident. pressure, to be used only temporarily in an Therefore, only use tire types and sizes emergency. approved for your vehicle model. Observe the Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire load rating and speed rating required for tire width in millimeters. your vehicle. Nominal aspect ratio: ; aspect ratio is the Regardless of the speed rating, always size ratio between the tire height and the tire observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and width and is shown in percent. The aspect Tire labeling 343 adapt your driving style to the traffic condi- 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed rating "(Y)" tions. indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186mph (300km/h). Ask the Summer tires tire manufacturer about the maximum Index Speed rating speed. Q up to 100mph (160 km/h) All-weather tires and winter tires R up to 106mph (170 km/h) Index Speed rating S up to 112mph (180 km/h) Q M+S5 up to 100mph (160 km/h) T up to 118mph (190 km/h) T M+S5 up to 118mph (190 km/h) H up to 130mph (210 km/h) H M+S5 up to 130mph (210 km/h) V up to 149mph (240 km/h) V M+S5 up to 149mph (240 km/h) W up to 168mph (270 km/h) i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide Y up to 186mph (300 km/h) the driving characteristics of winter tires. ZR...Y up to 186mph (300 km/h) Winter tires have, in addition to the M+S identification, the i snow flake symbol ZR...(..Y) over 186mph (300 km/h) on the tire sidewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Man- ZR over 149mph (240 km/h) ufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rub- ber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding R Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of the tire traction on snow. They have been over 149 mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" in especially developed for driving on snow. the size description, depending on the An electronic speed limiter prevents your

manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Wheels and tires vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph The service specifications consist of load (210km/h). bearing index A and speed rating B. The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac- RIf the size description of your tire includes tory may be higher than the maximum speed "ZR" and there are no service specifica- that the electronic speed limiter permits. tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The If a service specification is available, the required speed rating for your vehicle can be maximum speed is limited according to the found in the "Tires" section (Y page 352). speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this exam- Further information about reading tire data ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The can be obtained from any qualified specialist letter "Y" represents the speed rating and workshop. the maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186mph (300km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in brackets. Example: 5 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Z 344 Tire labeling

Load index The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers or retreaders to notify customers of recalls or other safety-related matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN consists of the manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the Canadian Trans- In addition to the load bearing index, load port Ministry. index : may be imprinted after the letters Manufacturer identification code: manu- that identify speed index B(Y page 342) on facturer identification code ; provides the sidewall of the tire. details on the tire manufacturer. New tires RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the have a code with two symbols. Retreaded example above), represents a standard tires have a code with four symbols. load (SL) tire Further information about retreaded tires RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced (Y page 324). tire Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. RLight Load: represents a light load tire Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used RC, D, E: represents a load range that by the manufacturer as a code to describe depends on the maximum load that the tire specific characteristics of the tire. can carry at a certain pressure Date of manufacture: date of manufacture i A provides information about the age of a

Wheels and tires Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Canadian tire regulations prescribe that every new tire manufacturer or retreader has to imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. Definition of terms for tires and loading 345

Tire characteristics Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressure The recommended tire pressure applies to This information describes the tire cord and the tires mounted at the factory. the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the ate from the data in the example. maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various Definition of terms for tires and load- operating conditions, i.e. differing load and ing speed conditions. Tire ply composition and material used Increased vehicle weight due to Describes the number of plies or the number optional equipment of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, This is the combined weight of all standard Wheels and tires nylon, polyester and other materials. and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds Rim per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted.

DOT (Department of Transportation) GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the Canadian Transport Ministry. The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The Normal occupant weight gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on The number of occupants for which the vehi- the driver's side. cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lb).

Z 346 Definition of terms for tires and loading

Speed rating Load index The speed rating is part of the tire identifica- In addition to the load-bearing index, the load tion. It specifies the speed range for which the index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of tire is approved. the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Curb weight The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare The weight of a vehicle with standard equip- wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug- ment including the maximum capacity of fuel, gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica- oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi- ble. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed tioning system and optional equipment if the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as these are installed in the vehicle, but does not specified on the vehicle identification plate on include passengers or luggage. the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum load rating GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The maximum load rating in kilograms or The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross pounds is the maximum weight for which a weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of tire is approved. the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle Maximum permissible tire pressure weight rating is specified on the vehicle iden- Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's tire. side. Wheels and tires

Maximum load on one tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated The maximum weight is the sum of: by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle Rthe curb weight of the vehicle by two. Rthe weight of the accessories Rthe load limit PSI (pounds per square inch) Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Kilopascal (kPa) Aspect ratio Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- Relationship between tire height and tire sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure width in percent. is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of 1 bar. Changing a wheel 347

Tire pressure TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is pressure inside the tire applying an This is a unique identifier which can be used outward force to each square inch of the tire's by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for surface. The tire pressure is specified in example for a product recall, and thus identify pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire be corrected when the tires are cold. type code and the manufacturing date.

Tire pressure of cold tires Load bearing index The tires are cold: The load bearing index (also load index) is a Rif the vehicle has been parked without code that contains the maximum load bearing direct sunlight on the tires for at least three capacity of a tire. hours and R if the vehicle has not been driven further Traction than 1 mile (1.6 km) Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Tread

The part of the tire that comes into contact Treadwear indicators with the road. d tires Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is Bead level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel Wheels an wires in the bead to prevent the tire from Occupant distribution coming loose from the wheel rim. The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Sidewall

The part of the tire between the tread and the Total load limit bead. Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the num- Weight of optional extras ber of seats in the vehicle. The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard Changing a wheel part and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These optional extras, such as high-performance Flat tire brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high- You can find information on what to do in the performance battery, are not included in the event of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section curb weight and the weight of the accesso- (Y page 306). Information on driving with ries. MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can

Z 348 Changing a wheel

be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with Direction of rotation run-flat characteristics" (Y page 307). Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk Rotating the wheels of hydroplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is G WARNING maintained. Interchanging the front and rear wheels may An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates severely impair the driving characteristics if its correct direction of rotation. the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci- Storing wheels dent. Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels dry and preferably dark place. Protect the and tires are of the same dimensions. tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are loca- Cleaning the wheels ted in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used G WARNING near the valve. This could damage the elec- The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt tronic components. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- to the tires or chassis components. Compo- cialist workshop. nents damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes when changing a wheel Do not use power washers with circular jet (Y page 347). nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged Wheels and tires tires or chassis components replaced imme- The wear patterns on the front and rear tires diately. differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires Mounting a wheel in the center. Preparing the vehicle If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you X can rotate the wheels according to the inter- Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book level ground. in your vehicle documents. If no warranty X Apply the electric parking brake manually book is available, the tires should be rotated (Y page 160). every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to X Bring the front wheels into the straight- 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do ahead position. not change the direction of wheel rotation. X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to position Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and P. the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel X Switch off the engine. is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor. Changing a wheel 349

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition X On level ground: place chocks or other lock. suitable items under the front and rear of X If included in the vehicle equipment, the wheel that is diagonally opposite the remove the tire-change tool kit from the wheel you wish to change. vehicle. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle tires

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, G WARNING it can be found in the tire-change tool kit If you do not position the jack correctly at the (Y page 306). appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the The folding wheel chock is an additional jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. safety measure to prevent the vehicle from

There is a risk of injury. Wheels and rolling away, for example when changing a Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- wheel. ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack X Fold both plates upwards :. must be positioned vertically, directly under X Fold out lower plate ;. the jacking point of the vehicle. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into ! the openings in base plate =. The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle- specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel Securing the vehicle on level ground is being changed. It is not suited for per-

Z 350 Changing a wheel

forming maintenance work under the vehi- full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com- cle. pletely. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Never disen- gage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. The jacking points are located just behind the RDo not use wooden blocks or similar wheel housings of the front wheels and just in objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels jack will not be able to achieve its load- (arrows). bearing capacity due to the restricted X Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire- height. changing tool kit and place it on the hexa- RMake sure that the distance between the gon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF underside of the tires and the ground does are visible. not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RNever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is Wheels and tires raised. RNever open or close a door or the tailgate when the vehicle is raised. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. X Position jack = at jacking point ;.

X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one Example Changing a wheel 351

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the beneath the jacking point. respective wheel. X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold completely on jacking point ; and the the wheel securely against the wheel hub base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. while screwing in the first wheel bolt. X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. X Unscrew the wheel bolts. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact X Remove the wheel. surfaces. X Mounting a new wheel Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and push it on. G WARNING X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin- Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged ger-tight. wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could Lowering the vehicle lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. G WARNING Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts Wheels and tires damage to the threads, contact a qualified and bolts are not tightened to the specified specialist workshop immediately. Have the tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. damaged wheel bolts or hub threads Have the tightening torque immediately replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 348). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been

Z 352 Wheel and tire combinations

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon noise emissions or fuel consumption, may nut of the jack so that the letters AB are otherwise be adversely affected. In addi- visible. tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen- X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is sion variations could cause the tires to once again standing firmly on the ground. come into contact with the bodywork and X Place the jack to one side. axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for wise pattern in the sequence indicated (: damage resulting from the use of tires, to A). The specified tightening torque is wheels or accessories other than those tes- 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). ted and approved. X Turn the jack back to its initial position. Information on tires, wheels and approved X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle combinations can be obtained from any tools in the vehicle again. qualified specialist workshop. X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun- ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rected wheel and adjust it if necessary. ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre- Observe the recommended tire pressure vious damage cannot always be detected (Y page 328). on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes- i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if wheels mounted must be equipped with retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount functioning sensors. used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. Overview of abbreviations used in the follow- Wheel and tire combinations ing tire tables: General notes RBA: both axles RFA: front axle Wheels and tires ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- R ommends that you only use tires and RA: rear axle wheels which have been approved by The recommended pressures for various Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi- operating conditions can be found: cle. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard These tires have been specially adapted for with the recommended tire pressures on use with the control systems, such as ABS the B-pillar on the driver's side or ESP®, and are marked as follows: Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original fuel filler flap RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended Observe the notes on recommended tire (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) pressures under various operating conditions Y RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- ( page 328). tain AMG tires) Check tire pressures regularly, and only when Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte- may only be used on wheels that have been nance recommendations of the tire manufac- specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. turer in the vehicle document wallet. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer- tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle Wheel and tire combinations 353

Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle with: Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/ right) Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 307). i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. i The following pages contain information on approved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras. If you want to equip your vehicle with

approved winter tires, it may be necessary Wheels and tires to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding size. The size of the approved winter tires may differ from the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory. The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries.

Z 354 Wheel and tire combinations

Tires GLA 250

Summer tires R 17

Tires Wheels BA: 215/60 R17 96 V BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/50 R18 97 V6, 7 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 V6, 7 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm) Winter tires R 17

Wheels and tires Tires Wheels BA: 215/60 R17 96 H M+Si BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 215/55 R18 95 H M+Si6 BA: 6.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) BA: 235/50 R18 97 H M+Si7 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

6 Also available as MOExtended tires. 7 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Wheel and tire combinations 355

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 H M+Si7 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm) All-weather tires R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/50 R18 97 H6, 7 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 H6, 7 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

GLA 250 4MATIC

Summer tires R 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 215/60 R17 96 V BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 Wheels and tires Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/50 R18 97 V6, 7 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 V6, 7 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

7 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 6 Also available as MOExtended tires.

Z 356 Wheel and tire combinations

Winter tires R 17

Tires Wheels BA: 215/60 R17 96 H M+Si BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 215/55 R18 95 H M+Si6 BA: 6.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) BA: 235/50 R18 97 H M+Si7 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 H M+Si7 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm) All-weather tires R 18

Tires Wheels Wheels and tires BA: 235/50 R18 97 H6, 7 BA: 7.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 95 H6, 7 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

6 Also available as MOExtended tires. 7 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Wheel and tire combinations 357

GLA 45 AMG 4MATIC

Summer tires R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 ZR19 99 Y XL7 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

R 20

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/40 ZR20 96 Y XL7 BA: 8.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm) Winter tires R 18

Tires Wheels BA: 215/55 R18 99 V XL M+S i BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.67 in (42.5 mm)

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/45 R19 99 V XL M+S i7 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheels and tires Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

7 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Z 358 359

Useful information ...... 360 Information regarding technical data ...... 360 Identification plates ...... 360 Service products and filling capacities ...... 361 Vehicle data ...... 368 Vehicle data for off-road driving ..... 369 Technical data 360 Identification plates

Useful information

Information regarding technical data General information i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) Identification plates ; VIN Vehicle identification plate with vehi- = Paint code cle identification number (VIN) i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-

Technical data tion plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate.

X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Service products and filling capacities 361

VIN Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear- of the reach of children. most position. X Fold up floor covering : in front of the H Environmental note right-hand front seat. Dispose of service products in an environ- You will see VIN ;. mentally responsible manner. The VIN can also be found in the following locations: Service products include the following: R Ron the lower edge of the windshield Fuels (Y page 361) RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Ron the vehicle identification plate RCoolant (Y page 360) RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Engine number Components and service products must be matched. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Technical data Information about tested and approved products can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip- tion on the containers: : Emission control information plate, RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) including the certification of both federal RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) and Californian emissions standards Other designations or recommendations indi- ; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) cate a level of quality or a specification in = Engine number (stamped into the crank- accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. case) MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Z 362 Service products and filling capacities

Fuel Model Of which Important safety notes reserve AMG vehicles Approx. G WARNING 2.1 US gal Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel (8.0 l) incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. All other models Approx. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating 1.6 US gal sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine (6.0 l) and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. Gasoline

G WARNING Fuel grade ! Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a There is a risk of injury. gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni- You must make sure that fuel does not come tion if you accidentally refuel with the into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel the fuel system. Even small amounts of the vapors. Keep fuel away from children. wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali- If you or others come into contact with fuel, fied specialist workshop and have the fuel observe the following: tank and fuel lines drained completely. R Wash away fuel from skin immediately ! using soap and water. Only refuel using unleaded premium R grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/ If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, 95 RON. immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance with- ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- out delay. ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- engine failure. Technical data tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ! Do not use the following: ing. R R E85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) Immediately change out of clothing which R has come into contact with fuel. E100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) Tank capacity RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) Model Total capa- RM100 (100% methanol) city RGasoline with metalliferous additives Models with 4MATIC 14.8 US gal RDiesel (56.0 l) Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use addi- All other models 13.2 US gal tives. Otherwise, engine damage may (50.0 l) occur. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixed with cleaning additives recommended by Service products and filling capacities 363

Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can Additives obtain further information from any author- ! Operating the engine with fuel additives ized Mercedes-Benz Center. added later can lead to engine failure. Do ! To ensure the longevity and full perform- not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does ance of the engine, only premium-grade not include additives for the removal and unleaded gasoline must be used. prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recom- If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila- mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with ble and you have to refuel with unleaded the instructions for use on the product gasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol- label. More information about recommen- lowing precautions: ded additives can be obtained from any ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use with premium-grade unleaded gasoline branded fuels that have additives. as soon as possible. The quality of the fuel available in some coun- RDo not drive at the maximum speed. tries may not be sufficient. Residue could R Avoid sudden acceleration and engine build up in the injection system as a result. In speeds over 3,000 rpm. such cases, and in consultation with an You will usually find information about the fuel authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso- grade on the pump. If you cannot find the line may be mixed with the cleaning additive label on the pump, ask the staff for assis- recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must tance. observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. i For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit Flexible Fuel vehicles http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Important safety notes Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can G WARNING refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel GLA 250, GLA 250 4MATIC: as a temporary incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- Technical data measure, if the recommended fuel is not sion. available, you may also use regular unleaded You must avoid fire, open flames, creating gasoline with an octane rating of 88 AKI/ sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine 93 RON. and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before All other models: as a temporary measure, if refueling. the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with G WARNING an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. reduce engine performance and increase fuel There is a risk of injury. consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and You must make sure that fuel does not come sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing with a lower AKI. and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel Information on refueling (Y page 157). vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

Z 364 Service products and filling capacities

If you or others come into contact with fuel, Engine oil observe the following: General notes RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, specification other than is necessary to ful- immediately rinse them thoroughly with fill the prescribed service intervals. Do not clean water. Seek medical assistance with- change the engine oil or oil filter in order to out delay. achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- cause engine damage or damage to the tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- exhaust gas aftertreatment. ing. Follow the instructions in the service inter- RImmediately change out of clothing which val display regarding the oil change. Other- has come into contact with fuel. wise, you may damage the engine and the Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the exhaust gas aftertreatment. following fuel types: When handling engine oil, observe the impor- Rpremium-grade unleaded gasoline tant safety notes on service products (Y page 361). RE85 fuel The engine oils are matched to the perform- Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service unleaded gasoline intervals. You should therefore only use i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized engine oils and oil filters that are approved for by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the vehicles with maintenance systems. inside of the fuel filler flap. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, Fuel consumption consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter. Or visit the website The energy content of E85 fuel is less than http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. that of the same amount of premium-grade The table shows which engine oils have been gasoline. The amount of fuel consumed when

Technical data approved for your vehicle. operating the vehicle with E85 fuel is therefore higher than with premium-grade gaso- Missing values were not available at time of line. going to print. Maintenance Model Engine MB model Approval Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter that you are operating or have operated GLA 250 270 the vehicle with E85 fuel. GLA 250 4MATIC 270 229.5 Low outside temperatures GLA 45 AMG 133 229.3, If the outside temperature is below 32 ‡ 4MATIC 229.5, (0 †), the starting procedure can take notice- 229.51, ably longer when operating with E85 fuel. 229.52 E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside temperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †). Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for AMG vehicles. Service products and filling capacities 365 i MB approval is indicated on the oil con- Brake fluid tainers. G WARNING Filling capacities The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of The following values refer to an oil change the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake including the oil filter. fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the Model Capacity brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. All models 5.9 US qt (5.6 l) There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at Additives the specified intervals. ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. When handling brake fluid, observe the This could damage the engine. important safety notes on service products (Y page 361). Engine oil viscosity The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Viscosity describes the flow characteristics Booklet. of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity Technical data means that it is thin. Coolant Select an engine oil with an SAE classification Important safety notes (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The table shows you which G WARNING SAE classifications are to be used. The low- If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- temperature characteristics of engine oils ponents in the engine compartment, it may can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore Let the engine cool down before you add anti- strongly recommended that you carry out reg- freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled ular oil changes using an approved engine oil next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the with the appropriate SAE classification. antifreeze from components before starting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine.

Z 366 Service products and filling capacities

Further information on coolants can be adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec- found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications tion. for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. i The coolant is checked with every main- on the Internet at tenance interval at a qualified specialist http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con- workshop. tact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, Filling capacities even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Model Capacity Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not AMG vehicles Approx. 12.6 US qt sufficiently protected from corrosion and (11.9 l) overheating. All other models Approx. 8.2 US qt i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a (7.8 l) qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 approved antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant Y ( page 361). Windshield washer system The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the Important safety notes following tasks: G WARNING R corrosion protection Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if R antifreeze protection it comes into contact with hot engine compo- Rraising the boiling point nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of If the coolant has antifreeze protection down fire and injury. to -35 ‡(-37 †), the boiling point of the cool- Make sure that no windshield washer con-

Technical data ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. (130 †). ! The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra- Only use washer fluid that is suitable for tion in the engine cooling system should: plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid R be at least 50%. This will protect the engine could damage the plastic lenses of the cooling system against freezing down to headlamps. approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). ! Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the will not be dissipated as effectively. level sensor may be damaged. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord- washer fluid should be mixed together. The ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod- spray nozzles may otherwise become ucts 310.1. blocked. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil- Comply with the important safety notes for led with a coolant mixture that ensures service products when handling washer fluid (Y page 361). Service products and filling capacities 367

At temperatures above freezing: Always have work on the climate control sys- X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture tem carried out at a qualified specialist work- of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. shop. MB SummerFit. Refrigerant instruction label Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter- Fit. Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature. RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB Win- terFit to 2 parts water. RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB Win- terFit to 1 part water. Example: refrigerant instruction label RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB : Warning symbol WinterFit to 1 part water. ; Refrigerant filling capacity i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB = Applicable standards SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer ? PAG oil part number fluid all year round. A Type of refrigerant Warning symbol : advises you about: Climate control system refrigerant Rpossible dangers R Important safety notes having service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R‑134a. Filling capacities Technical data The instruction label regarding the refrigerant Missing values were not available at time of type used can be found on the left, on the going to print. underside of the hood. AMG vehicles Capacity ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be Refrigerant 23.6 ± 0.4 oz used. The approved PAG oil may not be (670 ± 10 g) mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other- PAG oil 4.2 oz wise, the climate control system may be (120 g) damaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerant GLA 250 Capacity or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All Refrigerant applicable regulations must be adhered to, PAG oil SAE standard J639 included.

Z 368 Vehicle data

All other models Capacity Model : ; Maximum Opening Refrigerant 22.9 ± 0.4 oz headroom height (650 ± 10 g) GLA 250 73.6 in 80.5 in PAG oil 4.2 oz (1876 mm) (2045 mm) (120 g)

GLA 250 75.4 in 82.0 in Vehicle data 4MATIC (1914 mm) (2083 mm) General notes AMG vehicles 73.5 in 79.5 in Please note that for the specified vehicle (1866 mm) (2019 mm) data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result Missing values were not available at time of of: going to print. - tires AMG vehicles - load Vehicle length 175.0 in - condition of the suspension (4445 mm) - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum Vehicle width 79.6 in payload. including exterior (2022 mm) mirrors

Dimensions and weights Vehicle height 58.2 in (1479 mm) Wheelbase 106.3 in (2699 mm) Technical data Turning radius 38.7 ft (11.8 m) Maximum roof 220.5 lb load (100 kg)

All other models Vehicle length 173.9 in (4417 mm) Vehicle width 79.6 in including exterior (2022 mm) mirrors Vehicle data for off-road driving 369

All other models Wheelbase 106.3 in (2699 mm) Turning radius 38.8 ft (11.84 m)

Model Vehicle height GLA 250 58.8 in (1494 mm) Missing values for maximum water depth : were unavailable at the time of going to print. GLA 250 4MATIC 60.3 in When the vehicle is loaded and ready to drive, (1532 mm) it has a full tank, all fluids have been refilled and the driver is in the vehicle. Model Maximum trunk Further information about driving on flooded Y load roads ( page 167). GLA 250 220.5 lb (100 kg) Approach/departure angle GLA 250 4MATIC

Model Roof load GLA 250 166.3 lb (75 kg) GLA 250 4MATIC Technical data

Vehicle data for off-road driving Missing values for the approach/departure Maximum water depth angles at front : and rear ; were not available at the time of going to print. ! The water depth must not exceed the For further information about approach/ specified value. Note that the permissible departure angles, see (Y page 170). water depth is less in flowing water.

Maximum gradient-climbing capability Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability depends on the off-road conditions and the road surface conditions. GLA 250 4MATIC: the maximum gradient climbing ability is 65%.

Z 370 Vehicle data for off-road driving

Missing values for the GLA 250 and GLA 45 AMG 4MATIC models were unavailable at time of going to print. Accelerate carefully and make sure that the wheels do not spin when driving on steep terrain. i If the load on the front axle is reduced when pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the front wheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recognizes this and brakes the wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque is increased, making it easier to drive off. For further information about the maximum gradient climbing ability, see (Y page 171). Technical data 371 372